Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 891

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

V100R009C10

Commissioning Guide

Issue 04
Date 2017-02-28

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R009C10

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R009C10

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R009C10

iManager U2000 V200R014C60

iManager U2000 Web LCT V200R014C60

Intended Audience
This document provides information about commissioning and testing operations after
hardware installation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures for station and
network commissioning.

This document is intended for:

l Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk,


which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
WARNING injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or


supplement important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Based on Product Version V100R009C10


This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. The
update of contents is described as follows:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

4 Configuring NE l 4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800


and Network T32/8800 T64 is modified.
l 4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800
T16 is modified.
l 4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800 is
modified.
l 4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal
Platform Subrack is modified.

Updates in Issue 03 (2015-07-01) Based on Product Version V100R009C10


This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10.

Updates in Issue 02 (2015-03-20) Based on Product Version V100R009C10


This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. The
update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

6.12 Adjusting Adjusting Optical Power of Submarine Amplifier Board is


Optical Power of added.
Submarine
Amplifier Board

4.4 Setting the NE Setting NE Power Consumption Threshold is added.


Power Consumption
Threshold

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-12-01) Based on Product Version V100R009C10


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. The
update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

4 Configuring NE 4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM is added.


and Network

6 Commissioning Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board (New-Generation


Optical Power on 100G) is added.
Site

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-11-10) Based on Product Version V100R009C00


This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.
Compared with the 02 issue, The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

All Changed the required U2000 version from V200R014C50 to


V200R014C60.

All Optimized the operation procedure and added operation screenshots.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R009C00


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R008C10


This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with the 02 issue, The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

15 Configuring Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical Doctor is


the O&M modified.
Function Based
on Optical
Doctor

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-07-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C10


This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with the 01 issue, The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

6 4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board is added.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

All Changed the required U2000 version from V200R001C00 to


V200R014C50.

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C10


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10. The
update of contents is described as follows:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

1.7 Testing The EFI panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack is modified.
Connection
Points

4 Configuring 4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters is added.


NE and
Network

4.23 Checking The DIP switching setting for the TN18EFI board is added.
the Master/
Slave Subrack
for Universal
Platform
Subrack

6.13.1 The TN12HSC1 board is added.


Commissioning
the Optical
Power of OSC

9.4.8 The optical power equalization multimedia is added.


Commissioning
the Optical
Power
Equalization

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C00


This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00.
Compared with the 01 issue, updating of SPC120 and SPC200 is added.
Update Description

15 Configuring The "Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical Doctor" chapter
the O&M is added.
Function Based
on Optical
Doctor

9 Example for The "Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System" chapter is optimized.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

All Automatically Commissioning Optical Power for O&M Through


MDS 6630 is deleted.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2013-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R008C00


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00. The
update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

4 Configuring NE l Setting License is added.


and Network

9 Example for Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the


Commissioning the Coherent Transmission System is modified.
Optical Power of the
Coherent
Transmission System

5 Automatically Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through MDS


Commissioning 6630 is added.
Optical Power
Through MDS 6630

11.9 Testing Packet 11.9.5 Testing Ethernet Service Latency, Throughput, and
Ethernet Services Short-Term Packet Loss Ratio Using TP-Assist is added.
11.9.6 Testing Long-term Ethernet Packet Loss Ratios Using
TP-Assist is added.

Automatically Automatically Commissioning Optical Power for O&M


Commissioning Through MDS 6630 is added.
Optical Power for
O&M Through MDS
6630

2.1 Starting the Web Starting the Web LCT is modified.


LCT

2.2 Quck Guide of Quck Guide of the U2000 is modified.


the U2000

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C02


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-08-19) Based on Product Version V100R007C00


This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the 03 issue, updating is added.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

4 Configuring l 4.12 Configuring Boards is modified.


NE and l Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optical Doctor is
Network modified.

Example for "Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System" is modified.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

17 Reference 17.33 Measuring Trail Latency is modified.


Operations for
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007C00


This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the 02 issue, updating of SPC200 is added.

Update Description

4 Configuring Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optical Doctor is added.


NE and
Network

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-09-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C00


This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00. Only
the issue number is updated.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C00


The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

1.7 Testing The testing connection points for OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack is
Connection added.
Points

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

3 l Commissioning Procedure (OTN) is added.


Commissioning l Commissioning Procedure (OCS) is added.
and
Configuration
Procedure
During
Deployment

4 Configuring Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 Platform


NE and Subrack is added.
Network

6 l 6.6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(10G) is added.


Commissioning l 6.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board is
Optical Power added.
on Site
l 6.11 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light is added.
l 6.13.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC is modified.

11 l 11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels is added.


Commissioning l 11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services is added.
the Network

17 Reference 17.33 Measuring Trail Latency is added.


Operations for
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C03


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

Commissioning l Safety Mechanism and Safety Precautions is modified.


Guide of the l Requirements on Cleanness of the Fiber Connector Endface is
Raman added.
Amplifier
l Method of Testing the Fiber Cabling Quality is added.

8 Example of l 8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System is modified.


Commissioning l 8.3.1 Checking Design Documents is modified.
Optical Power
Based on 40 l The structure of 8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System,
Gbit/s Single- 8.7 OSNR Penalties, and 8.8 Adjusting Dispersion
Wavelength Compensation is modified.
System l 8.9.1 Incorrect Setting of Board Parameters is added.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is deleted.


Commissioning
Optical Power
Through MDS
6630

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Based on Product Version V100R006C03


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

5 Automatically l Routine Maintenance is added.


Commissioning l Common Problems Found During Link Optimization
Optical Power Commissioning is added.
Through MDS
6630 l How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of the RAU
Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target Value? is added.
l Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data
Synchronization is added.
l Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board Manufacturer
Information Between the NMS and Live Network is added.

6 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier is modified.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

Example for Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is modified.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

17.31 l PRBS Application Scenarios is deleted.


Configuring the l "PRBS Test" is added.
PRBS Test

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-04-05) Based on Product Version V100R006C03


The update of contents is described as follows:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

Adjusting the Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
On-off Gain of
the Raman
Board

5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is modified.


Commissioning
Optical Power
Through MDS
6630

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C03


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

Example for Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is added.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version V100R006C01


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

Adjusting the Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
On-off Gain of
the Raman Board

Automatic Automatic Commissioning is deleted.


Commissioning

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01


The update of contents is described as follows:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.

17.32 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.


NE Power
Consumption

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.

17.32 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.


NE Power
Consumption

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board is deleted.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is modified.


Commissioning
Optical Power
Through MDS
6630

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00


Update Description

Commissioning The procedures for commissioning and configuration during


and deployment are added.
Configuration
Procedure
During
Deployment

4 Configuring 4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is
NE and added.
Network

6.15 6.15.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board


Commissioning (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
of ROADM
Board

6.17 Example of 6.17.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM


Commissioning (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
Based on 10G
(or Lower)
Single-
Wavelength
System

7 Remotely 7.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and
Commissioning link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power

10 Configuring The chapter "Configuring Services and System Features" is added and
Services and provides hyperlinks to the Configuration Guide and Feature
Service Description where detailed procedures for configuring services and
Protection system features are described. In this manner, the whole commissioning
process during deployment is provided.

11 11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal


Commissioning Alarms, 11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection,
the Network 11.10 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System, 13 Checklist for
Commissioning During Deployment, and 14 Backing Up the NE
Database to the SCC Board are added.

17 Reference The section "Reference for Commissioning During Deployment" is


Operations for added.
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

Parameters The section "Parameter Description" is added.


Reference

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


The update of contents is described as follows:
l Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.

Update Description

Whole manual l This manual provides descriptions according to product series


OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any
difference between the products is described in the manual.
l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800
T64.

4 Configuring Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.


NE and
Network

Commissioning Description of commissioning the optical power of Raman boards is


Guide of the modified. The structure of the contents is adjusted and certain contents
Raman Amplifier are added.

6 11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

6 11.6.3 Testing Items is added.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

8 Example of 8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System, 8.2 Process for
Commissioning Commissioning a 40G System, 8.3 Preparations for
Optical Power Commissioning, and 8.9 Analyzing and Handling Common
Based on 40 Problems in a 40G System are added.
Gbit/s Single-
Wavelength
System

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is added. This section describes the


Commissioning scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used to
Optical Power automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations
Through MDS and procedure for the commissioning.
6630

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................1
1.1 Safety Operation Guide.................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols.......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers....................................................................................................................................................3
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on.............................................................................................................. 5
1.1.4 ESD..............................................................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Instruments and Tools.....................................................................................................................................................7
1.3 Reference Documents................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.4 Engineering Design Information.................................................................................................................................. 11
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document..................................................................................................................................11
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document..................................................................................................................................11
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check .............................................................................................................................. 12
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers............................................................................................................... 13
1.7 Testing Connection Points............................................................................................................................................ 13
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer................................................................................................................................... 24
1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly..................................................................................................................... 24
1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN.........................................................................................................26

2 Quick Guide................................................................................................................................. 28
2.1 Starting the Web LCT................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.1.1 Installing the Web LCT............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.1.2 Connecting to NEs.....................................................................................................................................................30
2.1.3 Logging In to the Web LCT.......................................................................................................................................31
2.1.4 Exiting the Web LCT.................................................................................................................................................32
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000.............................................................................................................................................32
2.2.1 Logging In to the U2000 Client.................................................................................................................................32
2.2.2 Getting to Know the U2000.......................................................................................................................................35
2.2.3 Shutting Down the U2000 Client.............................................................................................................................. 50
2.2.4 Using Online Help..................................................................................................................................................... 51

3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment............................... 52


3.1 Commissioning Procedure (OTN)................................................................................................................................53
3.2 Commissioning Procedure (OCS)................................................................................................................................ 58

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

4 Configuring NE and Network...................................................................................................61


4.1 Creating NEs by Searching...........................................................................................................................................64
4.2 Creating Optical NEs....................................................................................................................................................68
4.3 Logging In to an NE..................................................................................................................................................... 70
4.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold............................................................................................................71
4.5 Uploading the NE Data.................................................................................................................................................73
4.6 Setting NE ID and IP.................................................................................................................................................... 74
4.7 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually...................................................................77
4.8 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE................................................................................................ 79
4.9 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode........................................................................................................... 82
4.10 Setting License........................................................................................................................................................... 89
4.11 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions.............................................................................................................. 91
4.12 Configuring Boards.................................................................................................................................................... 93
4.12.1 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards................................................................................................ 93
4.12.2 Checking Board Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 96
4.12.3 Adding Ports.......................................................................................................................................................... 109
4.12.4 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board................................................................................................................ 110
4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board................................................................................................................111
4.14 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode..........................................................................................................114
4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters...........................................................................................................................................120
4.16 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection.................................................................................................. 121
4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM.................................................................................................................................124
4.18 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search........................................................................................................................ 127
4.19 (Optional) Configuring OD Route for a Trail...........................................................................................................129
4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64.................................................................. 132
4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16................................................................................... 144
4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800.............................................................................................. 157
4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal Platform Subrack......................................................................172

5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through MDS 6630............................... 187


5.1 Networking Scenarios.................................................................................................................................................188
5.2 Precautions for Commissioning..................................................................................................................................198
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power for Power Equilibrium Commissioning................................................................... 200
5.3.1 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network................................................................ 200
5.4 Commissioning Report............................................................................................................................................... 221
5.4.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report................................................................................................ 221
5.4.2 Generating a Commissioning Report...................................................................................................................... 221
5.5 Reference Operations................................................................................................................................................. 227
5.5.1 Viewing Operation Tasks.........................................................................................................................................227
5.5.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000...........................................................................................................................228
5.5.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information.................................................................................................................... 229
5.5.4 Querying Commissioning Index Data..................................................................................................................... 232
5.5.5 Checking the Fiber Designed Loss(EOL)............................................................................................................... 235

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

5.6 FAQ.............................................................................................................................................................................236
5.6.1 Commissioning Fails Because the MCA Board Detects No Signal........................................................................ 236
5.6.2 Output Optical Power of the OA Board Behind M40V Is Excessively Low But the MDMDS 6630 component
Reports a Commissioning Success and Displays No Error Message............................................................................... 239
5.6.3 Failure to Start Commissioning Because No OCh Trail Is Found.......................................................................... 239
5.6.4 Failing to Commission Multiplexed Wavelengths.................................................................................................. 240
5.6.5 Service Provisioning Fails or the Performance of Provisioned Services Is Poor.................................................... 241
5.6.6 TDC Search Fails on the TN54NS3 Board............................................................................................................. 242
5.6.7 Input Optical Power of the OA Board Is Greater Than the Target Value................................................................243
5.6.8 Failed to Obtain the Board Type..............................................................................................................................245
5.6.9 MDS 6630 component Commissioning Failed due to existent wave BER un-queried...........................................245
5.6.10 MDS 6630 component Commissioning Failed due to MCA cannot detect the new wave................................... 246
5.6.11 MDS 6630 componentCommissioning/Report Generation Failed due to the board information cannot be queried
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 250
5.6.12 How to Commission Optical Power Using the U2000 When the Optical Power Attenuation in a Cable Section in
a WDM Link Is High........................................................................................................................................................250
5.6.13 What Restrictions Does the U2000 Have on Optical NE Classification............................................................... 250
5.6.14 How to Set the Maximum Number of Wavelengths for a System with Multi-Level Subnets.............................. 251
5.6.15 How to Quickly Complete Deployment Commissioning in Case of Many Errors on the Network..................... 252
5.6.16 Solutions to Abnormal Optical Power in the Commissioning Report...................................................................252
5.6.17 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization Commissioning................................................................253
5.6.18 Meanings of Commissioning Trail Status Parameters...........................................................................................253
5.6.19 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target
Value?............................................................................................................................................................................... 254
5.6.20 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data Synchronization..................................................... 255
5.6.21 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and Live
Network............................................................................................................................................................................ 255
5.6.22 What to Do If the ALC Function Detects an Exception After Deployment or Expansion Commissioning?....... 255
5.6.23 Commissioning Exception for Line Compensation Using the ALC Function...................................................... 256
5.6.24 Commissioning Cannot Be Performed After a Switchover to the Secondary Site of a U2000 HA System......... 256
5.6.25 How to Deal with an Exception Indicating that the MDP Fails to Send a Message During the Synchronization of
Networkwide NMS Data?................................................................................................................................................ 256
5.6.26 Error Message Is Displayed When Insertion Loss Is Preset for an OCh Trail...................................................... 256
5.7 Event Code................................................................................................................................................................. 257
5.7.1 Event code: 0x4A007.............................................................................................................................................. 257
5.7.2 Event code: 0x4A042.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.3 Event code: 0x4A043.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.4 Event code: 0x4A044.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.5 Event code: 0x4A064.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.6 Event code: 0x4A067.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.7 Event code: 0x4A105.............................................................................................................................................. 259
5.7.8 Event code: 0x4A11E.............................................................................................................................................. 259
5.7.9 Event code: 0x4C012...............................................................................................................................................259
5.7.10 Event code: 0x4D104............................................................................................................................................ 259

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

5.7.11 Event code: 0xD1002.............................................................................................................................................260


5.7.12 Event code:0x44000050........................................................................................................................................ 260
5.7.13 Event Code: 0x9706.............................................................................................................................................. 260

6 Commissioning Optical Power on Site................................................................................. 261


6.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power........................................................................................................... 263
6.1.1 Basic Requirements................................................................................................................................................. 263
6.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence.......................................................................................................................... 263
6.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments................................................................................................................... 265
6.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board...........................................................................................................265
6.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light.................................................................................................................... 265
6.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board..................................................................................................266
6.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board....................................................................................................267
6.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board........................................................................................................... 268
6.5 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(New-Generation 100G)..................................................................... 269
6.6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(10G)...................................................................................................272
6.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board........................................................................................... 274
6.8 Testing Specifications of an TDM Board................................................................................................................... 274
6.8.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards................................................................ 275
6.8.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board............................................................ 277
6.9 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board........................................................................... 278
6.9.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board............................................................................. 280
6.9.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board............................................................................................. 281
6.10 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier.......................................................................................................282
6.10.1 Preparations........................................................................................................................................................... 284
6.10.2 Safety Mechanism and Safety Precautions............................................................................................................285
6.10.3 Requirements on Cleanness of the Fiber Connector Endface............................................................................... 286
6.10.4 Requirements on the Fiber Line............................................................................................................................ 288
6.10.5 Method for Testing the Fiber Cabling Quality...................................................................................................... 288
6.10.6 Checking the Fiber Connections............................................................................................................................292
6.10.7 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side....................................................................................................293
6.10.8 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function.................................................................................................. 295
6.10.9 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board.................................................................296
6.10.10 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board...........................................................................................................296
6.10.11 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board..................................................................................................300
6.10.12 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum.............................................................................................................................. 302
6.11 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light.........................................................................................................303
6.12 Adjusting Optical Power of Submarine Amplifier Board........................................................................................ 306
6.13 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel.......................................................................................... 308
6.13.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC........................................................................................................... 308
6.13.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board.................................................................................................311
6.14 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board............................................................... 311
6.14.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V Boards............................................................................................ 311

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

6.14.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board........................................................................................312


6.14.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board............................................................................................... 314
6.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board.................................................................................................. 316
6.15.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)................................................................. 316
6.15.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)...................................................................318
6.15.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9)................................................................... 319
6.15.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9)................................................................... 321
6.15.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4)............................................................ 323
6.15.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD2+WSMD2)............................................................ 324
6.15.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9+WSMD9)............................................................ 326
6.16 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM.................................................................................................................. 327
6.17 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System....................... 328
6.17.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................. 328
6.17.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station...................................................................... 329
6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA................................................................................................................ 333
6.17.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End.......................................................................................... 335
6.17.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board).....................................339
6.17.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)....................................................................................340
6.17.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)............................................................................345
6.17.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)............................................................................. 348
6.17.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)..............................................................................352
6.17.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)............................................................................358
6.17.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)..................................................................... 361
6.17.12 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD2+WSMD2).....................................................................364
6.17.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9).....................................................................367

7 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power............................................................................ 371


7.1 General Commissioning Sequence............................................................................................................................. 372
7.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network..................................................................................................374
7.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network................................................................................................... 375
7.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network.................................................................................................. 377
7.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning........................................................................... 379
7.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards....................................................................................................................379
7.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards............................................................................................................... 382
7.2.3 Monitoring the Optical Power by MCA/OPM8 Board........................................................................................... 383
7.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network................................................................ 384
7.3.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 384
7.3.2 Commissioning Procedure.......................................................................................................................................386
7.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A.................................................... 392
7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.................................................................................... 396
7.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)..400
7.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)...407
7.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)... 409

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

7.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM). 413
7.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 414
7.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 416
7.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 417
7.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D........................................................................................ 418
7.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)............ 419
7.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board
+Demultiplexer Board).....................................................................................................................................................422
7.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F.........................................................................................424
7.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G....................................................................................... 425
7.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization............................... 426
7.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization...............................431
7.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization................................ 432
7.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)..................................................................................................433
7.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU Boards...........................................................................................434
7.3.22 Commissioning OSNR.......................................................................................................................................... 435
7.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans.................................................................................. 436

8 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength


System.............................................................................................................................................440
8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System....................................................................................................................442
8.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System.................................................................................................................446
8.3 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................................................ 447
8.3.1 Checking Design Documents.................................................................................................................................. 447
8.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter..................................................................................................................................... 451
8.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength Non-Coherent System...................453
8.4.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 453
8.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station.................................................. 458
8.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive End................ 460
8.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization.....................................................................................................462
8.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System............................................463
8.5.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 463
8.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.........................................................................469
8.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station................................................................................................ 472
8.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station..........................................................................475
8.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization..................................................................................................... 477
8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System............................................................................................................... 478
8.7 OSNR Penalties.......................................................................................................................................................... 486
8.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.......................................................................................................................... 500
8.9 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System................................................................................. 502
8.9.1 Incorrect Setting of Board Parameters.....................................................................................................................502

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

8.9.2 OSNR Failure.......................................................................................................................................................... 502


8.9.3 Excessively High Incident Optical Power............................................................................................................... 503
8.9.4 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration......................................................................................................................... 503
8.9.5 Methods for Handling Other Faults.........................................................................................................................503

9 Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System
.......................................................................................................................................................... 505
9.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System................................................ 506
9.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system........................................................................................ 510
9.3 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................................................ 511
9.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Of Coherent System....................................................................................512
9.4.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 512
9.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station.................................................. 514
9.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and OTM Station at the Receive End...................... 517
9.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Drop Wavelengths and Links at the ROADM Station.......................... 519
9.4.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Pass-through Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station................... 521
9.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the ROADM Station............................................ 523
9.4.7 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station..........................................................................525
9.4.8 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization.....................................................................................................529
9.5 FAQs on Coherent System Commissioning............................................................................................................... 530

10 Configuring Services and Service Protection.................................................................... 531


10.1 Configuring Services................................................................................................................................................ 532
10.2 Configuring System Features................................................................................................................................... 532

11 Commissioning the Network................................................................................................ 534


11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms.................................................................... 536
11.2 Testing Protection Switching.................................................................................................................................... 537
11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection.................................................................................................538
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800.........................540
11.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board for OptiX OSN 6800......................................... 541
11.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards.....................................................................................542
11.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching............................................................................................................ 543
11.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching...................................................................................................... 545
11.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching............................................................................................................... 547
11.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching............................................................................................................... 550
11.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching.......................................................................................................... 554
11.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching........................................................................................................ 557
11.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching.................................................................................................... 560
11.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)................................................................. 562
11.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching..............................................564
11.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching...................................................................................................568
11.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching............................................................................................. 571
11.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching....................................................................................................... 574

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

11.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching...................................................................................................... 576


11.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching.................................................................................. 579
11.2.19 Verifying Linear MSP..........................................................................................................................................582
11.2.20 Verifying Ring MSP.............................................................................................................................................583
11.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching..................................................................... 585
11.2.22 Verifying SNCP................................................................................................................................................... 587
11.2.23 Verifying SNCTP.................................................................................................................................................589
11.2.24 Verifying Transoceanic MSP Ring Switching..................................................................................................... 591
11.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching.................................................................................................................... 593
11.2.26 Verifying DLAG.................................................................................................................................................. 595
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics..................................................................................................................................... 596
11.3.1 Testing the LCAS...................................................................................................................................................596
11.3.2 Testing the LPT......................................................................................................................................................599
11.3.3 Testing the STP/RSTP........................................................................................................................................... 599
11.3.4 Testing the MSTP.................................................................................................................................................. 601
11.4 Testing System Features........................................................................................................................................... 603
11.4.1 Testing IPA.............................................................................................................................................................603
11.4.2 Testing IPA of Raman System (CRPC01/RAU1/RAU2 + Detection Board + Auxiliary Detection Board).........604
11.4.3 Testing IPA of Raman System (RAU1/RAU2+ Auxiliary Detection Board)........................................................606
11.4.4 Testing ALC...........................................................................................................................................................608
11.4.5 Testing APE........................................................................................................................................................... 610
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks..................................................................................................................................611
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2................................................................................................................................................ 615
11.6.1 Testing Process...................................................................................................................................................... 615
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation................................................................................................................................. 617
11.6.3 Testing Items..........................................................................................................................................................619
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels........................................................................................................................... 622
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops...........................................................................................622
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function...........................................................624
11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels.............................................................................................................................. 625
11.8.1 Testing Tunnel Performance Using MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM................................................................................625
11.8.2 Testing PW Performance Using MPLS-TP PW OAM.......................................................................................... 626
11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................................. 627
11.9.1 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using Ping Commands..............................................................627
11.9.2 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using ETH-OAM......................................................................629
11.9.3 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance Using ETH OAM......................................................................... 631
11.9.4 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance by Using SmartBits...................................................................... 632
11.9.5 Testing Ethernet Service Latency, Throughput, and Short-Term Packet Loss Ratio Using TP-Assist................. 633
11.9.6 Testing Long-term Ethernet Packet Loss Ratios Using TP-Assist........................................................................ 636
11.10 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System................................................................................................................. 639
11.10.1 Setting the Orderwire Board................................................................................................................................ 639
11.10.2 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................................ 641

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

11.10.3 Configuring Conference Calls............................................................................................................................. 642


11.10.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................................ 644
11.11 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System............................................................................................ 646
11.11.1 Configuring Orderwire.........................................................................................................................................646
11.11.2 Configuring Conference Calls............................................................................................................................. 647
11.11.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................................ 648
11.12 Testing Orderwire Functions.................................................................................................................................. 650

12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal Analyzer...................................................................... 651


12.1 Testing Single-Channel Bit Errors............................................................................................................................653
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors.................................................................................................................................655

13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment......................................................... 658


14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board................................................................660
15 Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical Doctor............................................. 662
15.1 Setting Basic Parameters.......................................................................................................................................... 663
15.1.1 Synchronizing Data on the U2000.........................................................................................................................663
15.1.2 Setting OA Board Parameters................................................................................................................................664
15.1.3 Calibrating ASE.....................................................................................................................................................666
15.2 Setting the State of OCh Trails................................................................................................................................. 671
15.3 Configuring the OD Monitoring Function................................................................................................................672

16 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems........................................... 685


16.1 OSC/ESC Conflict.................................................................................................................................................... 686
16.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports...................................................................................................................... 688

17 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration............................... 691


17.1 Configuring the NE Data.......................................................................................................................................... 695
17.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.......................................................................................................................695
17.1.2 Replicating the NE Data........................................................................................................................................ 696
17.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack.......................................................................................................................... 697
17.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration.....................................................................................................................697
17.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE.................................................................................................. 697
17.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute............................................................................................................................... 698
17.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack................................................................................................................ 702
17.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack.......................................................................................................................................704
17.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming......................................................................................................................... 705
17.3.1 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................................... 705
17.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow.......................................................................................................... 706
17.3.3 Configuring the ROADM...................................................................................................................................... 707
17.4 Configuring the NE Time......................................................................................................................................... 718
17.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and NEs......................................................................718
17.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time............................................................ 719
17.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key...................................................................................................................... 720

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

17.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time........................................................................722
17.5 Performance Management........................................................................................................................................ 723
17.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold.............................................................................................................723
17.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters........................................................................................................ 725
17.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers................................................................................................................ 728
17.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs.............................................................................................................................. 730
17.6.1 Modifying the NE Name....................................................................................................................................... 730
17.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name...........................................................................................................................731
17.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 733
17.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs................................................................................................................................... 735
17.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Non-GNE........................................................................................................................... 736
17.6.6 Changing a Non-GNE to a GNE........................................................................................................................... 738
17.6.7 Deleting NEs..........................................................................................................................................................740
17.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration....................................................................................................................... 742
17.7.1 Deleting Boards..................................................................................................................................................... 742
17.7.2 Adding Boards....................................................................................................................................................... 744
17.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration.........................................................................................................................746
17.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information...................................................................................................................... 746
17.8.2 Deleting Fibers...................................................................................................................................................... 749
17.9 Creating a Single NE................................................................................................................................................ 751
17.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User............................................................................................................................ 755
17.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode...............................................................................................................757
17.12 Configuring the Edge Port...................................................................................................................................... 760
17.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection............................................................................................................. 761
17.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes.............................................................................................................. 763
17.15 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes.........................................................................................................764
17.16 Opening/Closing Lasers......................................................................................................................................... 765
17.17 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards.................................................................................................... 767
17.18 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)................................................................................................................... 768
17.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board....................................................................................... 769
17.20 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board......................................................................................... 771
17.21 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching..........................................................................771
17.22 Setting the NULL Mapping Status......................................................................................................................... 773
17.23 Configuring Path Binding.......................................................................................................................................774
17.24 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.................................................................................................................... 775
17.25 Setting the FEC Mode............................................................................................................................................ 776
17.26 Enabling and Disabling LPT.................................................................................................................................. 777
17.27 Setting the Speed Level of Fans............................................................................................................................. 778
17.28 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port................................................779
17.29 Configuring Ethernet Boards..................................................................................................................................780
17.29.1 Configuring Internal Ports................................................................................................................................... 780
17.29.2 Configuring External Ports.................................................................................................................................. 782

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

17.30 Verifying Ethernet Services.................................................................................................................................... 784


17.31 Configuring the PRBS Test.................................................................................................................................... 784
17.31.1 PRBS Test............................................................................................................................................................784
17.31.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board................................................................................. 786
17.31.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board ...................................................................................................... 787
17.31.4 Performing the PRBS Test in E2E Mode............................................................................................................ 789
17.32 Managing NE Power Consumption........................................................................................................................ 791
17.32.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption................................................................................................................... 791
17.32.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE...................................................................................................... 796
17.32.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report..............................................................................798
17.33 Measuring Trail Latency.........................................................................................................................................799
17.34 Enabling the ASON Feature................................................................................................................................... 801
17.35 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs...............................................................................................................803
17.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data.......................................................................................................................804
17.36.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods................................................................................ 804
17.36.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card........................................................................................ 809
17.36.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................................... 810
17.36.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board................................................................................................814
17.36.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card.................................................................................................... 815
17.36.6 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................................817
17.36.7 Disaster Restoration of NE Configuration Data.................................................................................................. 819

A Glossary......................................................................................................................................822

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

1 Preparations for Commissioning

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning.

1.1 Safety Operation Guide


This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety
regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to
prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.
1.2 Instruments and Tools
This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
1.3 Reference Documents
This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
1.4 Engineering Design Information
This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check
Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers
This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
1.7 Testing Connection Points
This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function
and connection types.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer
This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

1.1 Safety Operation Guide


This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety
regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to
prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols


During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the
alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.

Table 1-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment.

Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment


Symbol Describes

ESD protection symbol.


You must wear an ESD wrist strap or
glove to avoid damage caused by
electrostatic discharge to boards.

Laser level symbol.


Indicates the laser level and warns that
laser beams can cause injuries to eyes.

CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS

Grounding symbol.
Indicates the position of the grounding
point.

Regular cleaning symbol.


! ATTENTION 注意 Warns you to regularly clean the air
CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清扫
filter.

Fan warning symbol.


Warns you not to touch the fan blade
until the fan stops moving.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers


This section describes how to safely use fibers.

DANGER
Laser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause damage to
your eyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards and optical fibers, avoid
directly exposing your eyes to the laser beams originating from the optical interfaces or fiber
connectors.

Protection of Optical Connectors


All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical interface boards
must be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the replaced boards must be
promptly covered with protective caps. In addition, properly store these boards in their
packages to keep the optical ports clean.
Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Recommended protective caps

Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-2 Protective caps that are not recommended

NOTE

Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and other
material. These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.

Connecting Fibers

NOTICE
When applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the attenuation
to avoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is excessively high. For boards that
have the capability of having optical attenuators added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx
optical port rather than at the Tx optical port.

Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical power is
excessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to avoid damages to the
device caused by a high input of optical power.

DANGER
Before removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser to
avoid injuries due to the high optical power from the laser.

The CRPC board has specific requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, see
Table 1-2.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirements of the CRPC


Distance Loss (dB) Connector (piece)

0–10 (km) ≤0.1 0

10–20 (km) ≤0.2 0

NOTE

The ODF has only one connector for connecting to the CRPC board. All the other fiber connection points
must be spliced.

Cleaning Fibers

NOTICE
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber must be cleaned
before the fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports on the boards in the
equipment.

The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaning
tools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are:
l Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or formalin is
never used)
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Dust-free cotton stick
l Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or propyl
l Fiberscope

1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on


This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when the
power is on.
Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when the power is
on:
l Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on.
l Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on.
l Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with installation
requirements.

1.1.4 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow ESD procedures to prevent equipment damage:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.


l Check that the equipment is securely grounded.

NOTICE
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make sure
that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of
the equipment.

For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

NOTE

Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.

When you are following ESD procedures, take the following precautions:

l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be
between 0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two
years) has expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a
wrist strap that provides the required resistance value.
l Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is not
protected by the wrist strap.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or
chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips,
circuits, or pins with your bare hands.
l Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the
removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-
antistatic materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack
boards, and do not let these materials touch the boards.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

l Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESD-
sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you
connect them to the ports.
l Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room
for packing boards in the future.

ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089-
CORE.

1.2 Instruments and Tools


This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.

Table 1-3 describes how the tools and testing instruments are used for equipment
commissioning.

Table 1-3 Instruments and tools required for commissioning

Tool or Tester Usage

Laptop Used to install the U2000 Web LCT during network element
(NE) commissioning.

Optical power meter Used to measure the received optical power, receiver
sensitivity, and receiver overload at an optical port. It is
mainly used to measure the optical power on the client side
and the WDM side of the OTU. This meter also measures the
total optical power of the multiplexed signals.

Optical spectrum analyzer Used mainly to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR), and central wavelength for each wavelength in
the multiplexed signals.
NOTE
In a DWDM system, the optical power of a single wavelength in the
multiplexed signals needs to be measured using an optical spectrum
analyzer. The commissioning result from this method is more
accurate. When using this method, the noise impact does not need to
be considered.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to perform the
test. Use the following method to verify the calibration: measure the
optical power of the OUT optical port on the OTU using the optical
spectrum analyzer. Then compare it with the optical power obtained
by using an optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB,
the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is greater than 0.5 dB,
recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.

SDH analyzer Used for network commissioning and SDH service testing.

GE analyzer Used for the GE service testing.

10GE analyzer Used for the 10GE service testing.

OTN analyzer Used for the OTN service testing.

ESCON analyzer Used for the ESCON service testing.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Tool or Tester Usage

Ethernet analyzer Used for the data service testing.

FICON/FC analyzer Used for the FICON service and FC service testing.

Multimeter Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current intensity


during a power test.

Fiber microscope Used for checking the cleanliness of fiber end faces.

Phillips screwdriver Used to install or uninstall the board screws.

Compressed gas Used to clean optical ports of boards.

Fiber jumper Used for connections during the optical power test of optical
ports on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.

Cassette cleaner or lens Used to clean fiber end faces.


tissue

Flange Used to transfer the fiber jumper.

Fixed optical attenuator Used to attenuate the received optical power, which may
damage the optical component, during the received optical
power test for an optical port.

Variable optical attenuator Used for testing the receiver sensitivity and overload optical
(VOA) power of an optical port.
NOTE
l The attenuation increases when the VOA is adjusted clockwise
while decreases when adjusted counterclockwise.
l When adjusting the VOA counterclockwise, observe the optical
power closely. When the attenuation stops decreasing, stop the
adjustment immediately to avoid damages to the VOA.

A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required to
commission a 40G system. Table 1-4 lists three 40G SDH analyzers. Table 1-5 lists three
types of optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.
NOTE

A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate its
optical power setting.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-4 40G SDH analyzers


Name Appearance

ONT-506

NX 4000

MP1797A

Table 1-5 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing
Name Appearance

MTS8000

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Name Appearance

Agilent86145B/86142

AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317

Table 1-6 lists the 100G test meters.

Table 1-6 Optical spectrum analyzers for 100G system testing

Name Appearance

JDSU ONT-503

EXFO FTB-500

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

1.3 Reference Documents


This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 8800 equipment
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Feature Description
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 6800 equipment
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 3800 equipment
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description

1.4 Engineering Design Information


This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.

1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document


This section describes the required engineering survey documents.
The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and the work
instructions associated with the engineering survey.

1.4.2 Engineering Design Document


This section describes the engineering design documents required during equipment
commissioning.
The following engineering design documents are required for equipment commissioning:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

l Network diagram (including the networking diagram for the entire network, the basic
topological diagram, and the network management diagram)
l Board layout diagram of the cabinet
l Wavelength allocation diagram
l Cabinet fiber connection diagram
l Configuration diagram of the optical amplifiers
l Fiber connection diagram
l Optical attenuator list
l Design description file

1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check


Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
For details about checking the commissioning conditions, see the Installation Reference.

Table 1-7 Checking items


No. Task Item

1 Operating Environment and l Equipment Room


Grounding Specifications Environment
Requirements
l Power Supply
l Lighting
l Protection System
l Antistatic Protection
l Lightening Protection
and Grounding
Requirements

2 Installation Checklist l Checking the Cabinet


Installation
l Checking the Cabinet
Reenforcement
l Checking the Subrack
and Board
l Checking the Cable and
Fiber Routing
l Checking the DCM and
CRPC Modules
l Checking the Cabinet
Door Installation

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

No. Task Item

3 Grounding Specifications l General Grounding


Specifications
l Equipment Grounding
Specifications
l Specifications for
Managing Ground
Cables

4 Others l Engineering Labels


l Checking Cabling and
Bundling
l Inspecting and Cleaning
the Optical Fiber
Connectors

1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers


This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.

Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical network


commissioning and are skilled in using the test equipment.

Commissioning engineers must be familiar with:

l WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theories


l WDM equipment
l U2000/Web LCT and service configuration by using the U2000/Web LCT
l Analyzers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)

1.7 Testing Connection Points


This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function
and connection types.

Figure 1-4 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-8 and
Table 1-13.

Figure 1-5 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-8 and
Table 1-13.
NOTE

In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and general OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified. Distinguish the "Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32" and
"General OptiX OSN 8800 T32" subracks as follows: enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is the subrack with the
"Enhanced" label; general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is the subrack without the "Enhanced" label.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-6 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-8 and
Table 1-13.
Figure 1-7 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800
universal platform subrack. For the functional description of the testing connection points and
buttons, see Table 1-9, and Table 1-13.
Figure 1-8 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-10, and
Table 1-13.
Figure 1-9 shows the testing connection points on the chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-11, Table
1-12 and Table 1-13.

Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
EFI2 EFI1 PIU STI ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V
NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2

ALMI2 ALMO3
ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH1

CLK2

CLK1
ETH2

TOD2

TOD1
SERIAL
NM_ETH

ALMO4
ALMO2
ETH3

Front Back

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-5 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32
EFI2 EFI1
PIU ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V

NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ETH1

ALMI2 ALMO3 ALMO4


ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH2

SERIAL
NM_ETH1

ALMO2
ETH3

Fan

Fan

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-6 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
PIU

EFI AUX AUX ATE

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-7 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 Universal
Platform Subrack
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 LAMP1 LAMP2 SubRACK_ID NM_ETH1ALMI1 ALMO1 ALMO2 NM_ETH2
ID5 ID4 ID3ID2ID1
LAMP TEST RESET 1

PWR CRI MAJ MIN STAT PROG 0

SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC

SubRACK_ID

RESET
Fan

LAMP TEST

ALM CUT

SCC

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-8 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800
COM ETH3 ALM02 ALM04 ALMI1 LAMP1
ALM01 ALM03 SERIAL ALMI2 LAMP2

PIU
xcs SCC
STAT STAT RUN
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
PWRA
PWRB

NEG(-)
PWRC
ALMC

RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID

NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
Fan RESET
STAT
PROG
LAMP TEST
AUX

ALM CUT

xc SC
s C

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-9 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3800

FAN

STAT STAT RUN


ACT PROG
PROG
SRV DO not hot
PWRA plug this unit!
PWRB
PWRC
NM_ETH1

ALMC

S1 S11
S6
S5
S4
S2
SCC
SCC
AUX

PIU
PIU
RESET
NM_ETH2

LAMP
TEST
NEG(-)

ALM
CUT

PWR
RTN(+)

CRI
EXT

MAJ

MIN

SCC AUX PIU

Table 1-8 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 8800

Interface Silk- Function Description Connection


Screen Type

ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the RJ-45


ALMO2 centralized alarm and power distribution cabinet
by output ports and cascading ports. Other modes
ALMO3 can be configured to send the alarm output for
ALMO4 assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX
OSN 8800 provides eight channels of alarm
output. The first three channels, by default, are
critical alarms, major alarms, and minor alarms.
The other five channels are reserved for alarm
output cascading.

SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9


port which supports the X.25 protocol.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Interface Silk- Function Description Connection


Screen Type

ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45


ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring
remote monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names for the eight
alarm channels can be set to achieve remote
monitoring of the external alarms with the
external system.

LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45


LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.

NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45


NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 8800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
8800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE through a network cable to that on
another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45


subrack using a network cable to the same ports
on another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave
subracks.

CLK1/CLK2 CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time RJ-45


signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional.
That is, they input and output signals at the same
time.

TOD1/TOD2 TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time RJ-45


signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can
either input or output time signals.

PHONE Orderwire phone interface RJ-45

F1 F1 interface RJ-45

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-9 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 8800
Universal Platform Subrack
Interface Silk- Function Description Connection
Screen Type

ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the RJ-45


ALMO2 centralized alarm and power distribution cabinet
by output ports and cascading ports. Other modes
can be configured to send the alarm output for
assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX
OSN 8800 universal platform subrack provides
four channels of alarm output. The first three
channels, by default, are critical alarms, major
alarms, and minor alarms. The other channel is
reserved for alarm output cascading.

ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45


external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names of the four alarm
channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring
of the external alarms with the external system.

LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45


LAMP2 indicators of the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.

NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiX RJ-45


NM_ETH2 OSN 8800 universal platform subrack using a
network cable to the network port on the U2000
server to achieve management of the U2000 over
the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45


subrack using a network cable to the same ports
on another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave
subracks.

SubRACK_ID Used to show the subrack ID. -

LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this -
button, all indicators are lit

RESET Used to reset the EFI board. -

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-10 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 6800
Interface Silk- Function Description Connection
Screen Type

COM Commissioning port used for communications RJ-45


between the EFI and AUX boards.

ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the RJ-45


ALMO2 centralized alarm and power distribution cabinet
by output ports and cascading ports. Other modes
ALMO3 can be configured to send the alarm output for
ALMO4 assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX
OSN 6800 provides eight channels of alarm
output. The first three channels, by default, are
critical alarms, major alarms, and minor alarms.
The other five channels are reserved for alarm
output cascading.

SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9


port which supports the X.25 protocol.

ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45


ALMI2 external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names of the eight
alarm channels can be set to achieve remote
monitoring of the external alarms with the
external system.

LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45


LAMP2 indicators of the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.

NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiX RJ-45


NM_ETH2 OSN 6800 using a network cable to the network
port on the U2000 server to achieve management
of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45


subrack using a network cable to the same ports
on another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave
subracks.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-11 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 3800
Interface Silk- Connection
Screen Function Description Type

NM_ETH1/ Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45


NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 3800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
3800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.

EXT Accesses and outputs all external signals. DB64

Table 1-12 Function description of the testing EXT connectors on the OptiX OSN 3800
Interface Silk-
Screen (on Connection
Cables) Function Description Type

ETH Used as the COM commissioning port. RJ-45

F&f Debugs the serial port. DB9

ALMO The alarm output is sent to the centralized alarm RJ-45


and power distribution cabinet by output ports
and cascading ports. The port provides two
channels of alarm output and two channels of
output cascading.

ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45


ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring
remote monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). It is used to input six
channels of external alarms.

LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45


LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the chassis is
housed.

Table 1-13 Function description of the testing buttons


Interface Silk-Screen Function Description

RESET Used to reset the SCC board.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Interface Silk-Screen Function Description

ALM CUT The trigger switch is used to mute the alarm from the subrack.
You can either hide the prompt of current alarms by pressing
and then immediately releasing the button, or mute the alarms
by pressing the button for five seconds. When the audible
alarm function is turned off, the ALMC indicator on the SCC
board remains on. Otherwise, the audible alarm function is
turned on, and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board remains
off.

LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this button, all
indicators are lit.

1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer


This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.

1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly


This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to Ethernet port in the subrack using
a cable.

Prerequisites
The subrack must work normally.
The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network
segment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000, network cable

Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of the NMS
computer. The other end should be connected to the specified port on the board.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the
EFI2 or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.

Step 2 Determine if the green indicator of the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.

Step 3 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.

Step 4 On Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.

Step 5 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window
is displayed.

Step 6 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.

Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.

Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP
address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is
an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address must be unique and cannot be the same as
any of the existing IP addresses.

Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

NOTICE
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise, the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network card, select the corresponding local connection
for the network card connected to the subrack.

Step 11 Click OK.

----End

1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN


This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to the NE through a LAN.

Prerequisites
When the U2000 server connects to the NE through a LAN, the IP address is set in a way that
is similar to connecting the U2000 server to an Ethernet port in the subrack using a cable.
Note the following requirements:
l The subrack must work normally.
l The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same
network segment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000, network cable

Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the NMS computer into the LAN.
Step 2 Check the cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN using cables. The equipment is
connected to the LAN through the specified port on the board using cables.
NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the
EFI2 or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
The OptiX OSN 6800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX
board using cables.
The OptiX OSN 3800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX
board using cables.

Step 3 Determine if the indicator for the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Step 4 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.

Step 5 In Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.

Step 6 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window
is displayed.

Step 7 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 8 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.

Step 9 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.

Step 10 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP
address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is
an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address is unique and cannot be the same as any of
the existing IP addresses.

Step 11 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

NOTICE
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network cards, select the corresponding local connection
for the network card connected to the subrack.

Step 12 Click OK.

----End

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2 Quick Guide

About This Chapter

The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT and
the U2000.
The U2000 is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can centrally
manage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security
equipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). With powerful management functions at the NE
and network layers, the U2000 is the major future-oriented network management product and
solution for Huawei equipment. In the telecommunication management network (TMN)
hierarchy, the U2000 is located between the element management layer and network
management layer, and supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
The Web LCT is an element management system (EMS) in an optical transport network. In
the TMN, the Web LCT is located at the NE layer. Based on the browser/server architecture,
the Web LCT allows you to perform all operations of NE-level configuration and
maintenance. The Web LCT accesses a local NE through a LAN or a serial port, and accesses
a remote NE over data communications channels (DCCs).
2.1 Starting the Web LCT
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000
The following topics introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth,
trouble-free launch of the U2000.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2.1 Starting the Web LCT


The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.

2.1.1 Installing the Web LCT


You can install the Web LCT using a CD or DVD, or by copying and decompressing the
software package that contains the Web LCT.

Installing the Web LCT by Copying and Decompressing the Software Package
1. Obtain the software package that contains the Web LCT from Huawei engineers.
2. Decompress the installation software package that includes
U2000WebLCTversion_en_win32_x86.zip.
NOTE

Ensure that the decompressing directory contains no spaces, punctuation, or non-alphabetic


characters.

Installing the Web LCT Using a CD or DVD


1. Insert the installation CD or DVD.
2. Run the setup.exe file.
3. Select the language version for Wizard, and click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.
6. Select the installation directory, and click Next.
NOTE

When you click Browse to select a different installation folder, ensure that the destination path
does not contain spaces or punctuation.
7. The following dialog box is displayed. Select the features you want to install based on
the following NOTE. Click Next.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

NOTE

When you select the features to be installed, COMMON must be selected and other features can
be selected based on the managed equipment.
l For OTN equipment using the North American version only, select NA OTN.
l For OTN equipment using the global version only, select NG WDM.
l It is recommended that all the features are selected.
8. Click Install to install the Web LCT. The entire installation process lasts five minutes.
9. After the installation is complete, the Installation finished dialog box is displayed.
Click Finish.

2.1.2 Connecting to NEs


Connect the computer where the Web LCT is installed to an NE using a crossover or straight-
through cable so the Web LCT can directly manage the connected NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the crossover or straight-through cable to the Web LCT. One end of the cable should
be connected to the network port of the computer. For the specific ports and boards to be
connected, see Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Specific port on a board


Product Board Name Port

OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 EFI1/EFI2 NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 EFI NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2

OptiX OSN 6800 AUX NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2

OptiX OSN 3800 AUX NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2

Step 2 Check the green indicator of the network adapter interface of the computer and the indicators
on the board that connect to the computer.
NOTE

The indicator of the computer and the green "LINK" indicator on the board remain on. The orange
"ACT" indicator on the board should blink.
If the three indicators are malfunctioning:
l Replace the network cable with a new one. If the indicators are functioning correctly, the original
cable is faulty.
l If all the above-mentioned indicators are still malfunctioning, check whether the network adapter
of the computer and the board that connects to the network cable are functioning correctly.

Step 3 Change the IP address of the computer being used to commission the NE so that the computer
IP address is on the same subnet as the default IP Address of the NE.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

NOTE

l The default IP address of an NE ranges from 129.9.0.0 to 129.9.0.255 or from 129.9.191.0 to


129.9.191.255.
l Change the computer IP address that is in the same network segment as the NE, for example,
129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255.
l Change the computer subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.

----End

2.1.3 Logging In to the Web LCT


Log in to the Web LCT before performing NE settings on the Web LCT.

Procedure
1. Double-click the startweblct_https.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to launch
the Web LCT application.
2. In the browser, enter the default value admin for User Name and Changeme_123 for
Password.

3. Enter the Verification Code according to the picture that is displayed on the right side.
4. Click Login to display the NE List window.

Postrequisite
After logging in to the Web LCT,pay attention to the following if you need to commission an
NE on the Web LCT:

l When no U2000 user logs in to an NE and an LCT user requests to log in to the NE, the
NE does not refer to the LCT Access Control parameter and allows the LCT access
directly
l When a U2000 user has logged in to an NE and then an LCT user requests to log in to
the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in based on the LCT
Access Control parameter.
l When an LCT user has logged in to an NE and then a U2000 user requests to log in to
the NE, the login of the LCT user does not affect the login of the U2000 user, and the
successful login of the U2000 user does not affect the logged-in LCT user.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

l When the LCT user and the U2000 user log in to the NE at the same time, set LCT
Access Control to Prohibit Access. This does not affect the LCT user that has already
logged in.

2.1.4 Exiting the Web LCT


After performing initial NE commissioning using the Web LCT, log out of the commissioned
NE, reconnect the network cables to the NE, and exit the Web LCT.

Procedure
Step 1 Highlight the NE that you are logged in to, and click the NE Logout at the bottom of the
screen.
Step 2 Physically disconnect the Web LCT from the NE

Step 3 Close the browser.

Step 4 Double-click the stopweblct.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to stop the Web LCT
application.

----End

2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000


The following topics introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth,
trouble-free launch of the U2000.

2.2.1 Logging In to the U2000 Client


Log in to the U2000 client to manage NEs by performing management operations on the
U2000 client.

Prerequisites
Before logging in to the U2000 client, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l The U2000 server is started.
l The network communication between the U2000 client and U2000 server is available.
NOTE

Run the ping peer_IP_address command to check network communication.


l The ports used between the U2000 client and U2000 server are not blocked by the
firewall.
l The IP address of the client must be contained in the access control list (ACL) that is
configured on the U2000 server.
NOTE

The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL
restriction range based on the security requirements.
l Legitimate U2000 user names and passwords have been allocated.
l U2000 licenses have been correctly loaded to the server.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Background Information
By default, after you enter an incorrect password three consecutive times, the user account is
locked by the U2000 server. The administrator user admin can unlock the account of a
common user. In addition, the system can automatically unlock the account in 30 minutes.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the operating system where the client program is installed.
l On a Windows OS, log in to the OS as user administrator.
l On a Solaris OS, log in to the GUI as user ossuser.
Step 2 On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog box is
displayed.

NOTE

l For a Windows OS, double-click the startup_all_global.bat file in the D:\oss\client directory to
start the client.
l For a Solaris OS, run the command of ./startup_all_global.sh in the \opt\oss\client directory to start
the client.

Step 3 Optional: If the intended server is not configured, perform the following operations to add a
server:
1. Click the ... button. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.
2. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the parameters of the U2000 server to be
added, and click OK.

Table 2-2 Server parameter settings


Parameter Settings

Name It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP address for
login or the related host name.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Parameter Settings

Server Name (or It is recommended that you set this parameter to an IP address.
IP Address) – In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the
system IP address of the server.
– In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is the
IP address of NMS application network in the active site
server.

Port There are two data transmission modes: Common and


Security(SSL). By default, port 31037 is used in Common mode
and port 31039 is used in Security(SSL) mode.

Mode There are two data transmission modes: Common and


Security(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query command
to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -
cmd query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and
the SUSE Linux OS. The default data transmission mode is
Common.
NOTE
– A client can log in to the U2000 server only when they work in the
same mode. If the client and server work in different modes, even if
they are installed on the same host, the client cannot log in to the
server.

3. In the Server List dialog box, select a record from the record list. Then, click OK.
Step 4 In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User Name and
Password to the valid values, and click Login.
NOTE
By default the user name is admin, The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123 (It is
Admin_123 for a U2000 that comes preinstalled). The password must be changed during the first login
to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Step 5 Optional: When you log in to the U2000 client, if the system detects that the local version is
older than the server version, a prompt is displayed asking you whether to upgrade the client.
l Click OK to upgrade the local version to the server version (recommended). This
ensures version consistency on the U2000 client and on the U2000 server.
l Click Cancel, which prevents you from logging in to the client of the server version.
Step 6 After you log in to the U2000 client, the U2000 automatically displays the workbench
window where default shortcut icons are displayed.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

----End

2.2.2 Getting to Know the U2000


This topic describes how to start the U2000 system, include: Main Topology, NE Panel, NE
Explorer, Frequently Used Shortcut Icon, Common Shortcut Keys.

Main Topology
All topology management functions can be accessed through the Main Topology on the
U2000. These functions include creating topological objects and subnets, and searching for
existing equipment in the network. You can search, view, create, set, and manage NEs and
subnets. You can also search, create, configure, and maintain management functions on the
Main Topology

Navigation Path
In the Workbench window, double-click the Main Topology shortcut icon.

GUI Description
Figure 2-1shows the Main Topology of the U2000 client.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-1 Main Topology

No. Area Description

1 NMS name This area displays the full name of the U2000.

2 Menu bar You can operate the U2000 and NE using a submenu
bar. The operations include configuring and managing
tasks.

3 Shortcut icon By clicking a shortcut icon, you can perform a simple


task quickly; for example, exit the U2000, lock the
U2000 client, log out, manage U2000 users, stop the
current alarm sound, access NE manager, view alarms,
and create connections.

4 Shortcut icon on the By clicking this icon, you can zoom in or out or
Main Topology page refresh or save the view, show or hide the navigators,
search objects, monitor object attributes, and lock or
unlock the view.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

No. Area Description

5 Alarm button bar The alarm pane provides fault information about the
entire network by collecting statistics on the alarms of
different severities and their status according to the
current alarm template.
The alarm pane can function as a monitoring panel. On
the alarm button bar, the alarms severities are marked
in different colors, and the number indicates the
number of uncleared alarms.

6 Filter tree and legend In this area, you can set the display types of the
objects, and examine the descriptions of the legends in
a view.

7 Time and date Displays the client time in real time.

8 User name Displays the user name of the current logged-in U2000
user.

9 Server IP address and Displays the name that is set by the current U2000
name client and the IP address of the current U2000 server.

10 Physical map Views NEs.


In the Main Topology, you can perform operations
such as Creating NEs, Configuring the NE Data,
Creating Connections, Browsing Fibers/Cables,
Deleting Topology Objects, Browsing the Current
Alarm, and Starting the NE Data Collection; enter the
NE Explorer to configure the service for the NE and so
on.
You can check the NE status and communication status
in the Filter Tree or on the Legend tab.

11 Coordinate value Displays the current mouse coordinate in the Main


Topology.

12 Topology navigation Displays all the NEs managed by the U2000 so they
tree can be quickly located.

13 Current Alarms In this area, you can browse the alarms that require
attention and processing by setting the filtering criteria
of the current alarm.

NOTE

In the Current View drop-down list, you can select Physical Root, Current View, and Custom View.

NE Explorer
The NE Panel displays boards and ports in different colors indicating their current status. On
the U2000, most operations such as equipment configuration, monitoring, and maintenance
are performed in the NE Panel window.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Navigation Path
In the Main Topology, right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.

GUI Description
Figure 2-2 shows an NE Explorer of the U2000 client.

Figure 2-2 NE Explorer

No. Area Description

1 Object display Displays the current NE, subracks on the NE, and boards
area in each subrack.

2 Shortcut icon
l Click to display the NE panel.

l Click to switch to another NE.

l Click to back up the NE database.

l Click to obtain online help.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

No. Area Description

3 Function tree You can select a function from the Function Tree to
perform operations, such as configuring services,
creating connections, and querying alarms on the current
NE.

4 Right-hand Displays different windows based on the functions that


window are selected from the Function Tree. You can click a
shortcut icon to switch to another window.

Opening the NE Panel


The NE Panel displays subracks and boards on an NE. The color of the icon indicates the
current state of the component. On the NMS, the NE Panel is a key user interface for
configuring, monitoring, and maintaining equipment.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000


l In the Main Topology, double-click an NE icon and select the NE in the pane on the left
side. The pane on the right side displays the NE Panel by default.
----End

Procedure on the Web LCT


l Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. The pane on the right side displays the NE
Panel by default.
----End

User Interface
NE Panel is product-specific. Figure 2-3 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Figure 2-4 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 2-5 shows the NE Panel
of the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 2-6 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-3 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-4 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-5 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 6800

Figure 2-6 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800

Using Shortcut Icon


This section describes the frequently used shortcut icons on the U2000 Client.
You can customize the toolbar so only the frequently used shortcut icons are displayed on the
toolbar. To do so, right-click the toolbar and choose a menu item from the shortcut menu.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Table 2-3 The shortcut icons on the Main Topology


Button Name Description

Workbench l Style of Favorites Folder: By


selecting it, you can modify or
delete the default workbench.
l Style of Desktop: By selecting it,
you can return to the workbench.

Exit Exits the client.

Log Out Logs out of the current user.

Lock Terminal Locks the current client.

Full Screen Displays the Main Topology in full


screen mode.

NMS User Manages user information


Management

Maintain SDH Displays the Maintenance SDH


Protection Subnet Protection Subnet window.

Manage SDH Trail Displays the Manage SDH Trail


window.

Create SDH Trail Displays the Create SDH Trail


window.

Manage WDM Trail Displays the Manage WDM Trail


window.

Browse Current Displays the Filter dialog box. After


Alarm the filter criteria is set, displays the
Browse Current Alarm window.

Browse Alarm Logs Displays the Filter dialog box. After


the filter criteria is set, displays the
Browse Alarm Logs window.

Stop the Current Clicks this shortcut to stop the


Alarm Sound current alarm sound.

Main Topology Switches to the Main Topology.

NE Explorer Displays the NE Explorer window.

Create Fiber Creates fiber.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Button Name Description

Browse SDH Displays the Browse SDH


Performance Performance window.

Browse WDM Displays the Browse WDM


Performance Performance window.

WDM Optical Displays the WDM Optical Power


Power Commissioning window.
Commissioning

IPA Management Displays the presence of the IPA


that is in the disabled state. This
icon blinks if a disabled IPA exists.
When you click this icon, the IPA
Management window is displayed.

NM Tasks Displays the process of NMS tasks


Management management. When you click this
Progress icon, the Configuration Data
Management Progress window is
displayed.

Networkwide Performs centralized monitoring


Maintenance Status over the maintenance and operating
status of the equipment
managed,including:
l Alarm Reversion
l DCC Enabling Status
l Path Loading
l Alarm Suppression
l Alarm Insertion
l Optical (Electrical) Interface
Loopback
l Cross-Connection Loopback
l Laser Status

Show alarm panel Displays the Alarm Panel dialog


box. The statistics of all current
alarms are displayed by default.

Critical Alarm Dynamically displays critical


alarms. When you click this icon, all
critical alarm information is
displayed.

Major Alarm Dynamically displays major alarms.


When you click this icon, all major
alarm information is displayed.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Button Name Description

Minor Alarm Dynamically displays minor alarms.


When you click this icon, all minor
alarm information is displayed.

Warning Alarm Dynamically displays


warnings,When you click this icon,
all warning or alarm information is
displayed.

No new events Dynamically displays abnormal


events. This icon indicates that there
are no newly reported events. When
you click this icon, the Query
Event Logs window is displayed.

New events Dynamically displays abnormal


events. This icon indicates that there
are newly reported events. When
you click this icon, the Query
Event Logs window is displayed.

New To create a custom view, subnet,


NE, and link.
NOTE
The NE cannot be created in the custom
view.

Back to Parent To return the parent interface.

Select To select a topology object.

Move View To move the topology view.

Search Displays the Search dialog box.


You can locate objects in the
topology.

Print To print the topology view.

Print Preview To preview the print effect of the


topology view.

Overview To provide a general view of


topology.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Button Name Description

NE Statistics l To collect statistics on the NE


types and number of the objects
selected in the current topology
view.
l If no object is selected in the
current topology view, the
system collects statistics on the
types and number of all NEs in
the current topology view.

Refresh Refreshes the current view after you


click the button when the data in the
view is changed. For example, if an
IP link is changed in the link
management window, you can click
this button to display the latest IP
link data in the Main Topology.

Save Position To save the position information of


the topology objects in the current

Legend & Filter & To display the legend/filter/attribute


Attribute panel.

Current Alarm To display the current Alarms.

Layout To arrange the topology objects in


the topology view.

Zoom In Zooms in topology view.

Zoom Out Zooms out topology view.

Local Amplification To enlarge the selected area. In the


topology view, drag the mouse to
generate a rectangle. Topology
objects in this rectangle are
magnified.

Lock View/Unlock Locks/Unlocks the current NE(s).


View

Ascending Lists the objects on the Object Tree


in an ascending or a descending
order.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Button Name Description

Descending NOTE
Topology objects in the navigation tree
are sorted according to the following
rules:
l No matter whether topology objects
are sorted in ascending or
descending order, the order of the
types of topology objects is
unchanged, namely, local NMS,
subnets, NEs with subnodes, and
NEs without subnodes. The local
NMS is always displayed on the
top.
l The types of topology objects are
sorted by name alphabetically.
Object names are case insensitive.

Table 2-4 The shortcut icons on the other GUI


Button Name Description

Shrink all Shrinks Alarm/Event Name.

Classify by group Classifies alarms by group ID.


id

Classify by Classifies alarms by severity.


severity

Classify by type Classifies alarms by type.

Classify by Classifies alarms by category.


category

NE Time Synchronizes the NE time and NMS


Synchronization time.

Synchronize Synchronizes the current alarms of an


Current Alarms NE.

Browse Current Browses the current alarms of an NE.


Alarms

Clear Alarm Clears the current alarm indications


Indication of an NE.

Refresh NE Panel Refreshes the NE panel status to


Status enable the NE panel to display the
latest data.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Button Name Description

Back Up NE Backs up NE data to the system


Database To control board.
system control
board

Display/Hide Displays or hides the extended slot on


Extended Slot the Extended Slot tab.

Legend Displays a legend and its description.

Using Shortcut Keys


This following table describes the common shortcut keys. Using shortcut keys, you can
increase the operation efficiency.

Shortcut Key Description

F1 Opens the Help.

Enter Confirms the operation or moves downward to the next line. If the
cursor is on a button, pressing Enter confirms the operation. If the
cursor is in the list box, press Enter once and the cursor then moves
downward to the next line.

Esc Closes a dialog box.

Tab Switches between buttons if the cursor is on a button, or switches


between text boxes if the cursor is in a list box.

Ctrl+F Searches resources, such as the NEs, subnets, cards, frames,


interfaces, and VLANs in basic and rapid modes, by pressing Ctrl+F
in all views.

Ctrl+A Selects all the NEs or all the contents in a list. If the cursor is in the
view, press Ctrl+A to select all NEs. If the cursor is in a list box,
press Ctrl+A to select all contents in the list.

Ctrl+X Selects all NEs or selects all contents in the list. If the cursor is in the
view, press Ctrl+X to select all NEs. If the cursor is in the list box,
press Ctrl+X to select all contents in the list.

Ctrl+C Quickly copies the text in a table.

Ctrl+V Pastes the copied data to another data area.

Ctrl+Alt+U Unlocks a terminal.

Alt+F4 Exits the system.

Ctrl+S Saves the data.

F11 Displays full screen.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Shortcut Key Description

Ctrl+F4 Closes the current window.

Ctrl+F5 Restores down (when the service window in the public window is
maximized).

Ctrl+F9 Minimizes the window (applied to the service window in the public
window).

Ctrl+F10 Maximizes the window (when the service window in the public
window is restored).

Ctrl++ Zooms in the topology view.

Ctrl— Zooms out the topology view.

Alt+F Opens the File menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+E Opens the Edit menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+V Opens the View menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+U Opens the Fault menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+P Opens the Performance menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+C Opens the Configuration menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+R Opens the Service menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+I Opens the Inventory menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+S Opens the Administration menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+W Opens the Window menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+H Opens the Help menu from the Main Menu.

2.2.3 Shutting Down the U2000 Client


Ensure that all U2000 clients are shut down before you shut down the U2000 server.

Prerequisites
The U2000 clients must be started correctly.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.


If certain operations are performed in the Main Topology on the U2000 client but not saved, a
prompt is displayed asking you whether to save them.

----End

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2.2.4 Using Online Help


Online Help provides help information about the U2000.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is displayed.
NOTE

When using the U2000 client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help page.

----End

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

3 Commissioning and Configuration


Procedure During Deployment

About This Chapter

This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OTN system and OCS
system.
3.1 Commissioning Procedure (OTN)
This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OTN system.
3.2 Commissioning Procedure (OCS)
This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OCS system.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

3.1 Commissioning Procedure (OTN)


This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OTN system.
The commissioning procedures for the equipment can be divided into two parts: optical power
commissioning and network commissioning.
l Optical power commissioning procedures individually commission the optical power
values of NEs and boards based on the optical signal flow. They also remove the
abnormal attenuation of lines or boards based on the requirements of optical power, and
the gain and insertion losses of the boards.
l Network commissioning procedures include the commissioning protection function,
commissioning feature function, testing bit errors, and other functional commissioning
operations at the network level.
NOTE

For the ASON network, the commissioning procedures and requirements refer to Automatic Commissioning
Process and Commissioning Items for ASON Network.
NOTE

When functioning as an OLA NE, OptiX OSN 3800 supports optical-layer ASON. Before using the optical-
layer ASON function, enable the ASON Feature.

Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 provides the general commissioning procedures.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

Figure 3-1 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 8800/6800


Configuring
Installation Installing the
Creating an NE Port of the Creating Fibers
Equipment
Board

Creating an Checking Creating OCh


Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide trails using the
Installation
Element Software trail search
Version function
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment
Configuring
Manually the ROADM
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE

Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Service on
Service
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
& WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System

Testing Bit
Errors

Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

Figure 3-2 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 3800


Configuring
Installation Installing the
Creating an NE Port of the Creating Fibers
Equipment
Board

Creating an Checking Creating OCh


Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide trails using the
Installation
Element Software trail search
Version function
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE

Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Service on
Service
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
&
WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System

Testing Bit
Errors

Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment
by using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX iManager U2000 Web
LCT (Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be
performed on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the
computer hardware and can be started quickly.
Table 3-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

Table 3-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment
No. Task Mandato Tool
ry/
Optional

1 Creating NEs in Batches. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

2 Creating Optical NEs. Mandatory U2000

3 Setting NE Power Consumption Threshold. Mandatory U2000

4 Uploading the NE Data. Mandatory U2000

5 Setting NE ID and IP. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Mandatory U2000 or Web


U2000/Web LCT Server Manually. LCT

7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of Mandatory U2000 or Web


an NE. LCT

8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Optional U2000


Communication. Perform this task when the
network uses HWECC for communication and
more than four Huawei equipment NEs use the
extended ECC for communication.

Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000


the network uses IP over DCC for communication.

Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task Optional U2000


when the network uses OSI over DCC for
communication.

9 Setting license. Optional U2000

10 Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Optional U2000

11 Configuring Boards. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

12 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode. Mandatory U2000


Perform this task on the U2000. on the
U2000

13 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross- Optional U2000 or Web


Connection. Perform this task when ROADM according LCT
stations are configured on the actual network. to the
network

14 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search. Perform this Mandatory U2000


task on the U2000. on the
U2000

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

No. Task Mandato Tool


ry/
Optional

15 Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optional U2000


Optical Doctor. Perform this task on the U2000.

16 Commission optical power by using one of the Mandatory U2000 or Web


following methods as required: LCT
l Automatically Commissioning Optical
Power Through MDS 6630
l Commissioning Optical Power on Site
l Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
NOTE
This document uses a 40-channel system as an example
to describe optical power commissioning. The optical
power commissioning methods for an 80-channel
system are similar. The main difference is that the 40-
channel system and 80-channel system have different
requirements on nominal single-wavelength optical
power and single-wavelength incident optical power for
OA boards.
NOTE
See Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based
on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System to
commission optical power of a 40 Gbit/s system.
See Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Coherent Transmission System to commission
optical power of the Coherent Transmission System.

17 Configuring Services. Mandatory U2000

18 Configuring System Features. Mandatory U2000

19 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Mandatory U2000 or Web


Removing Abnormal Alarms. LCT

20 Testing Protection Switching. Mandatory U2000

21 Testing Data Features. Mandatory U2000

22 Testing System Features. Mandatory U2000

23 Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Mandatory U2000

24 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System and Optional U2000 or Web


Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS LCT
System.

25 Testing Orderwire Functions. Optional U2000 or Web


LCT

26 Testing Bit Errors. Mandatory OTN analyzer or


SDH analyzer

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

No. Task Mandato Tool


ry/
Optional

27 Checking the entire network against the Checklist Mandatory U2000 or Web
for Commissioning During Deployment. Ensure LCT
that the network configurations are correct.

28 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Mandatory U2000 or Web


Board. LCT

3.2 Commissioning Procedure (OCS)


This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OCS system.
Figure 3-3 provides the general commissioning procedures.

Figure 3-3 General commissioning procedures (OCS)


Installation Installing the
Creating an NE Creating Fibers
Equipment

Creating an Checking
Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide
Installation
Element Software
Version
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE

Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the Configuring Port
Service on
Service of the Board
Configuration
Configuration Guide
& Configuring the
Commissioning OCS Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
OCS Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System

Testing Bit
Errors

Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment
by using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX iManager U2000 Web
LCT (Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be
performed on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the
computer hardware and can be started quickly.
Table 3-2 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment.

Table 3-2 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment (OCS)
No. Task Mandato Tool
ry/
Optional

1 Creating NEs in Batches. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

2 Creating Optical NEs. Mandatory U2000

3 Uploading the NE Data. Mandatory U2000

4 Setting NE ID and IP. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Mandatory U2000 or Web


U2000/Web LCT Server Manually. LCT

6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of Mandatory U2000 or Web


an NE. LCT

7 Setting Manually Extended ECC Optional U2000


Communication. Perform this task when the
network uses HWECC for communication and
more than four Huawei equipment NEs use the
extended ECC for communication.

Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000


the network uses IP over DCC for communication.

Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task Optional U2000


when the network uses OSI over DCC for
communication.

8 Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Optional U2000

9 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode. Mandatory U2000


Perform this task on the U2000. on the
U2000

10 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

11 Configuring Boards. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

12 Configuring Services. Mandatory U2000

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

No. Task Mandato Tool


ry/
Optional

13 Configuring System Features. Mandatory U2000

14 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Mandatory U2000 or Web


Removing Abnormal Alarms. LCT

15 Testing Protection Switching. Mandatory U2000

16 Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Mandatory U2000

17 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS Optional U2000 or Web


System. LCT

18 Testing Orderwire Functions. Optional U2000 or Web


LCT

19 Testing Bit Errors. Mandatory SDH analyzer

20 Checking the entire network against the Checklist Mandatory U2000 or Web
for Commissioning During Deployment. Ensure LCT
that the network configurations are correct.

21 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Mandatory U2000 or Web


Board. LCT

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4 Configuring NE and Network

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks.

4.1 Creating NEs by Searching


When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs
that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment
to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is
quicker and more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in
batches is recommended.
4.2 Creating Optical NEs
The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.
4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
4.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold
After an NE is powered on, set the NE power consumption threshold on the U2000 based on
the actual power distribution of the NE.
4.5 Uploading the NE Data
By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the
network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the
NE data by uploading the data.
4.6 Setting NE ID and IP
ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for
searching on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you
must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing
collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or
expansion process, if you need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can
change the NE ID on the U2000.
4.7 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is
consistent with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with
the time of the U2000/Web LCT server.
4.8 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the
performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during
the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status
performed by maintenance personnel.
4.9 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode
When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE uses the extended ECC
in autosensing mode.When the number of Huawei NEs that use the extended ECC
communication exceeds five, you must use extended ECC in specified mode.
4.10 Setting License
This chapter describes how to perform license setting on the NMS. For example: The smart
line card/The TP-Assist function/The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 standard Subrack Speedup.
4.11 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions
After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.
4.12 Configuring Boards
In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board
This topic describes how to commission a multi-carrier line board.
4.14 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode
In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.
4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters
Before configuring the centralized monitoring function for the Optical Doctor (OD), you need
set an inter-site fiber type and fiber length. If the fiber type is not configured or is incorrectly
configured, the incident optical power will be incorrectly calculated. If the fiber length is not
configured, there is no impact because the fiber length will be automatically calculated. If the
fiber length is incorrectly configured, the OSNR calculation will be incorrect. The design end
of life (EOL) value of fiber loss must be set to determine whether the fiber loss exceeds the
design EOL value. If the EOL is incorrectly configured, the SPAN_LOSS_EXCEED_EOL
alarm will be reported, indicating that the fiber loss exceeds the design EOL value. This topic
describes how to set the fiber parameters in batches.
4.16 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM
Optical-connections are configured using the NMS to achieve flexible ROADM.
4.18 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search
After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search
for the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end
WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.19 (Optional) Configuring OD Route for a Trail


In addition to centralized configuration, individual configuration can be used to configure an
OD route for each trail to achieve E2E OSNR detection. If no OD route is configured, no
OSNR value can be displayed and no OSNR equalization can be performed.
4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.
4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.
4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.
4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal Platform Subrack
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.1 Creating NEs by Searching


When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs
that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment
to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is
quicker and more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in
batches is recommended.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l The U2000 must communicate properly with the GNE.
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.
For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched out.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Legend Information
Figure 4-1 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-1 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000


1. Visit the following navigation path.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2. Create NEs in batches.


– Set the Search Mode as Search for NE.

4
5

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

3
:Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAP
Address.
You can repeat the above step 3 to step 5 to add more search domains. You can delete the
system default search domain.
l If you use IP address to search for NEs:
l only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can be searched out
in normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range of GNE because
broadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the network (to prevent network
storm).
l search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address of GNE if
you need to search for the NEs across routers.
l If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAP Address.

6
: Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.

7
:
l The default NE user is root.
l The default password is Changeme_123 or password.
– Set the Search Mode as IP auto discovery.
NOTE

If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After enabling IP
auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEs related
to the GNE.

NOTICE
In the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router, these NEs
cannot be searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be searched out only by
network segment.

3. Click Next and the Result area is displayed.


NOTE

You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.
4. Optional: Select a created NE and click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE ID
dialog box is displayed. Users can check against the Bar Code List by the value of Bar
Code, and then modify the NE Name, Extend NE ID, Base NE ID, and IP Address
fields accordingly.
NOTE

The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the software
commissioning personnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

5. Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the search, you
can select the uncreated NEs from the Result list and click Create. The Create dialog
box is displayed. Enter the NE User and Password. Click OK.
6. Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The Set
Gateway NE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE list. The Search NE dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Add. The New Domain dialog box is displayed.
4. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. Enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Repeat 2 through 4 to add multiple search domains.
6. Close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.
7. Select the appropriate IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.
NOTE

l The NE search function searches for only the NEs in the specified network segment.
l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
8. After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt
message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.
9. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or
right-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed,
enter lct and Changeme_123 or password in the User Name and Password fields
respectively, and then click OK.
NOTE

You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.


If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to
multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.
If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do
not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and
password for login last time.

Reference Information
Item Description

Creating a Single NE If you have obtained the ID of an NE, you


can create the NE manually.

Switching a Logged-In NE User You can switch a login NE user without


logging out of the U2000 or Web LCT.

Modifying the NE Name You can change the NE name as required.


This operation does not affect the running of
the NE.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Item Description

Deleting NEs If you have created a wrong NE, you can


delete the NE from the U2000 or Web LCT.

Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE
user.

4.2 Creating Optical NEs


The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating
the NE of the type.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Legend Information
Figure 4-2 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-2 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000


1. Navigation path.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2
1

2. The Basic Attributes setting.

3
4

3. The Resource Division setting.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2
3

NOTE

To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE and
choose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list

on the left, and then click to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.
4. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Modifying the Optical NE See this section to change


Operation Name the name of an optical NE
independently.

4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.

Prerequisites
The NE must be created and must be working normally.

The user must have logged in to the U2000.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
On the U2000, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in to the NE.

A NE only allows 15 users to log in at the same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel for the
ONE.

Step 2 Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box.

----End

4.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold


After an NE is powered on, set the NE power consumption threshold on the U2000 based on
the actual power distribution of the NE.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Precaution
The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the
actual power distribution capability; otherwise, alarms will be falsely reported.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Legend Information
Figure 4-3 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-3 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Procedure on the U2000


1. Visit the following navigation path.

2. Set the NE power consumption threshold.


2 3

4
1

NOTE

4
: The setting of NE Power Consumption Threshold depends on the area division. For
details about area division, see Power Redundancy. The NE Power Consumption Threshold
parameter needs to be set based on the network planning and practical power distribution
capability of the NE. For details about the maximum power consumption of each subrack, see
"Power Consumption" of the subrack.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.5 Uploading the NE Data


By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the
network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the
NE data by uploading the data.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l The NE must be created successfully.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Legend Information
Figure 4-4 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-4 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000


1. Navigation path.

2. Uploading the NE Data.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

1 3

NOTE

When the upload is complete, an error is reported, indicating that no wavelength or bandwidth
have not been configured for the port. However, this error report does not affect the upload and
you can continue to perform the configuration.

Follow-up Procedure
1. For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type and Cross-Connect Capacity must be set
based on the current license requirements refer to 17.2.3 Changing a Subrack
Attribute; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.
2. After uploading the NE data, if the logical boards are not added, you can add logical
boards refer to 17.7.2 Adding Boards

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Configuring the NE Data You can configure the NE


Operation data in upload or manual
mode.

4.6 Setting NE ID and IP


ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for
searching on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you
must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing
collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or
expansion process, if you need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can
change the NE ID on the U2000.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher.
The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000. They share one NE ID
and one NE IP.
If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the
NE varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between
the NE ID and IP address is canceled automatically.

Association Between the ID and IP Address of an NE


An NE ID consists of 24 bits, with 8 most significant bits for a extended ID and 16 least
significant bits for a basic ID. The extended ID ranges from 0x1 to 0xFE, and the basic ID
ranges from 0x1 to 0xBFEF. 0xFFFFFF is an internal reserved value and is used as the
broadcast address.
The association between the ID and IP address of an NE is described as follows: A factory
default NE IP address is provided together with the NE delivery. The factory default NE IP
address is derived from the NE ID and is in the format of 129.9.basic ID(8 most significant
bits).basic ID(8 least significant bits). For example, if the factory default NE ID is 0x070004,
the default NE IP address is 129.9.0.4. If the NE IP address is not manually configured, it is
associated with the NE ID. To be specific, the NE IP address is changed accordingly if the NE
ID is changed. The association ends once the NE IP address is manually configured.

Precautions

NOTICE
l Changing the ID of an NE is a risky operation because it causes the NE to be reset,
which further results in an NE communication failure during the reset.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the function connected with the NE ID, for example,
the Client 1+1 Protection group, the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection group, the Optical
Wavelength Shared Protection group, the wavelength locking function,the Optical Line
Protection group, IPA, ALC, APE, OPA,OD,ECC,inter-NE fiber connection and so on.
After changing the NE ID, reconnect the fiber connection and re-configure the protection
group, IPA, ALC and other function connected with NE ID on the U2000.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the manually added monitoring relationship between
the WMU board and the OTU board on the NE. After changing the NE ID, restore the
deleted monitoring relationship on the U2000.
l After changing the NE ID and resetting the NE, log in to the NE again, otherwise, when
you change the IP, an error message will be displayed prompting that you have not
logged in to the NE.

Legend Information
Figure 4-5 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-5 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
l Setting NEs ID
a. Modify the NE ID.

3
1

NOTICE
For GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and
other NEs on the U2000. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs
that are originally connected to the GNE.

NOTICE
For non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this
NE and other NEs on the U2000.

l Setting NEs IP

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2
3

NOTE

l The defalut NE IP should be changed in time to ensure system security.


l When the gateway type is set to OSI gateway, you can set NSAP Address as required.
l The communication mode between the NMS and an NE can be changed by setting Connection
Mode.
l If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE
varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE
ID and IP address is deleted automatically.
l For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to set the IP address of the GNE accordingly in the
DCN management and specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that are originally connected
to the GNE.

----End

4.7 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT


Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is
consistent with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly
record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with
the time of the U2000/Web LCT server.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

On the Web LCT, the synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or NULL.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Background Information
Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verify
that the system time on the U2000/Web LCT server is correct. If you want to change the
system time, exit the U2000/Web LCT to reset the time, and then restart the U2000/Web LCT.

Legend Information
Figure 4-6 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-6 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000


1. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS time.

4
3

批注框标注。选择形状,然后开始键入。将框的大小调整到
所需尺寸。移动控制手柄可以将指针对准要标注的对象。
5
2

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
from the Function Tree.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the
NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Configuring the NE Time With the time


Operation synchronization function,
consistency is maintained
between the NE time and
the U2000/Web LCT server
time.

4.8 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE


By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the
performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during
the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status
performed by maintenance personnel.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Precaution
If the latest period of the performance monitoring is not finished, after you reset the beginning
time for monitoring the NE performance, the incomplete historical data of the performance
monitoring will be lost.

Procedure on the U2000


1. Visit the following navigation path.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2. Enable performance monitoring function.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

3
1

NOTE

4
: Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the check
box 24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled.

5
: Select the date, and enter the time to set the beginning time and end time for
monitoring. The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to
monitor the performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of
the NMS and NE. To set the end time, select the check box before To first. The end time must be
later than the start time. If the check box before To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring
function is enabled all the time.

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance
Monitor Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time, select the
desired NE.
NOTE

An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.

2. In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the
From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.
NOTE

The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, right-
click the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.

3. In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the From
field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Performance Management To ensure the normal


Operation functioning of the network,
the network management
and maintenance personnel
should periodically check
and monitor the network by
taking proper performance
management measures.

4.9 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode


When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE uses the extended ECC
in autosensing mode.When the number of Huawei NEs that use the extended ECC
communication exceeds five, you must use extended ECC in specified mode.

Prerequisites
The equipment must be installed according to the planning. The connections of the cables and
fibers are correct.
The user must log in to the NE.

Legend Information
Figure 4-7 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-7 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Precaution (Autosensing Mode)


The autosensing mode obviates the need for multiple site visits of software commissioning
personnel. For example, Table 4-1 shows site A: NE_a1, NE_a2, and NE_a3. NE_a1
communicates with the U2000 through HWECC, and NEs_a2 and a3 communicate with the

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

U2000 through extended ECC. Without the autosensing mode, the extended ECC is disabled
by default and consequently NEs_a2 and a3 cannot communicate with the U2000. To achieve
the communication, software commissioning personnel need first to enable the automatic
extended ECC for NE_a1 using the U2000 and visit the site to manually enable the automatic
extended ECC for NEs_a2 and a3. With the autosensing mode, software commissioning
personnel need only to enable the automatic extended ECC for NE_a1 using the U2000. Then
NE_a1 will automatically enable the extended ECC for its Ethernet neighbor NEs (a2 and a3),
obviating the need for site visits.
The extended ECC communication is in autosensing mode by default. To make all NEs
communicate with each other properly, you must enable the extended ECC communication of
the gateway NEs on the U2000 as follows:In the NE Explorer,

2 3

NOTE

For the non-gateway NE, when the number of Huawei NEs that use the extended ECC communication does
not exceed four, you can keep Autosensing mode unchanged.

Background Information (Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode)


The extended ECC Ethernet ports vary depending on the NG WDM series. The details are as
follows:
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet
port (NM_ETH) on the EFI1 and EFI2 board.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
(NM_ETH) on the EFI board.
l OptiX OSN 6800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
(NM_ETH) on the AUX board.
l OptiX OSN 3800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
(NM_ETH) on the AUX board
The extended ECC in specified mode can be set on site or remotely. When setting the ECC
extended mode remotely, strictly comply with the following sequence: set the farthest NE
without the OSC first, and then the NE with the OSC. Normally, the NE with the OSC is
configured as the server. In the case of the NE without the OSC, the communication between

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

the U2000 and the NE stops after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The
communication between the U2000 and the NE is restored automatically after the setting on
the NE with the OSC at the station is complete.
When configuring the extended ECC in specified mode, configure one or multiple NEs as the
servers and other NEs as the clients. An NE that is configured as a server NE can also be the
client of other server NEs. If an NE is only configured as a server NE, it supports a maximum
of eight client NEs. When eight client NEs are fully configured, the server NE cannot be used
as the client of any other server NEs. To use a server NE as the client of another server NE,
ensure that no more than seven client NEs are configured for the server NE. All port numbers
of server NEs must be different.

NOTICE
l The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of the
gateway NE must be modified last.
l The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs.
l Do not set the gateway NE to the server. The NE closest to the gateway NE is
recommended to be the server NE.
l When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly comply with the required setting
sequence. Otherwise, the communication between the U2000 and the NE where the
communication with the U2000 stops cannot be restored automatically. In this case, on-site
resetting is required. Hence, when setting the ECC extended mode remotely, work out the
ECC setting plan in advance to ensure that the settings are correct.

For example, a station has eight NEs. The optical supervisory channel board is configured at
NE_a1. NE_a1 is the server end. NE_a7 is the client end of NE_a1 and the server end of
NE_a8. Figure 4-8 shows the network topology and Table 4-1 provides the IP addresses of
the NEs and the ECC setting plan.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-8 Network topology of a station

NOTE

NEs of the station are cascaded through network cables.

Table 4-1 Configuration plan for extended ECC in specified mode


NE IP Address Set Server Set Client

IP Port Opposite IP Port

NE_a1 132.37.49.130 0.0.0.0a 1601 - -

NE_a2 132.37.49.131 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

NE_a3 132.37.49.132 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

NE_a4 132.37.49.133 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

NE_a5 132.37.49.134 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

NE_a6 132.37.49.135 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

NE_a7 132.37.49.136 0.0.0.0a 1602 132.37.49.130 1601

NE_a8 132.37.49.137 - - 132.37.49.136 1602

a: Indicates the local NE.


When remotely configuring the extended ECC in specified mode for a site, follow the
sequence below:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

The default ECC extended mode is the autosensing mode.

NE_a8→NE_a7 client end→NE_a6, NE_a5, NE_a4, NE_a3 and NE_a2→NE_a1 server


end→NE_a7 server end

During the configuration, the status of the communication between the U2000 and NEs
changes frequently.

l After the setting at NE NE_a8 is complete, the communication between the U2000 and
NE NE_a8 stops.
l After the setting at NE NE_a7 client end is complete, the communication between the
U2000 and NE NE_a8 stops.
l After the settings on NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4, NE_a5 and NE_a6 client end are
complete, the communication between the U2000 and NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4,
NE_a5 and NE_a6 stops.
l After the setting at NE NE_a1 server end is complete, the communication between the
U2000 and NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4, NE_a5 and NE_a6 restores automatically.
l After the setting at NE NE_a7 server end is complete, the communication between the
U2000 and NE NE_a8 restores automatically.

Procedure
Step 1 Setting the Client NE

1 6

4 5

NOTE

l The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet.
l The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the server NE. The port number
cannot be the same as the value of the Port field in the Set Server area.
l The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port and the
server port of the local NE cannot be the same. For specific procedure, see "Setting the Server NE."

Step 2 Setting the server NE

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4 5

NOTE

l The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the client NE.
l The port number of the server NE must be the same as the port number of the client NE.

----End

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameters
Field Value Description

ECC Extended Mode Autosensing Autosensing mode: An NE in this mode does


mode, Auto not proactively send ECC discovery packets to
Mode, its interconnected neighbor NEs but receives
Specified Mode and responds to such packets. Two neighbor
Default Value: NEs in autosensing mode do not proactively
Autosensing establish an extended ECC connection with
mode each other. Instead, an NE establishes an
extended ECC connection as a response only
when the automatic extended ECC is enabled
for its neighbor NE.
Auto Mode means that NEs automatically
achieve ECC communication through the
Ethernet. The configuration of the auto mode is
easy but extra connections are established.
Hence, the resource utilization ratio is low. The
auto mode is used usually when the number of
NEs is less than 4. In addition, two NEs can
automatically establish extended ECC
communication only after the ECC Extended
Mode parameters of the two NEs are set to
Auto mode.
Specified Mode means that NEs realize ECC
communication only after you specify the client
and server. The reliability of the connection that
operates in the specified mode is high and the
bandwidth utilization ratio is also high. In
normal cases, use the specified mode to
establish extended ECC communication.
An NE cannot operate in three modes at the
same time to establish ECC communication
with another NE.
To establish extended ECC communication
between two NEs in the specified mode, you
need to specify one NE as the server and the
other NE as the client.

Set Server IP 0.0.0.0 IP address of the NE. It cannot be modified.

Port 1601 to 1699 Specifies the port of the current NE that is used
Default: 1601 for extended ECC communication.

Set Client Opposit - Specifies the IP address of the opposite NE.


e IP

Port 1601 to 1699 Specifies the port of the opposite NE that is


Default: 1601 used for extended ECC communication. The
ports used at the two NEs must be the
consistent.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.10 Setting License


This chapter describes how to perform license setting on the NMS. For example: The smart
line card/The TP-Assist function/The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 standard Subrack Speedup.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.
l The license file has been installed.
l The NE has been created on the NMS.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Legend Information
Figure 4-9 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-9 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

U2000Batch Configuration
1. Visit the following navigation path.

2. Select the desired license.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

3. On the NE license Authorization window, select the desired NE and set the license.

1
3
4

NOTE

1. To set the license to support TP-Assist, on the right side of the window, change the NE license
status from off to on and click Apply on the lower right corner of the window.
2. To set the license to support a smart line card, in the column of OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card SDH Encapsulation Ability fee or OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card Packet Encapsulation Ability fee, enter the number of virtual ports, and
click Apply.
3. To set the license to support OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup, in the column of
OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup enter the number of borads, and click
Apply

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Single NE Configuration
You can also navigate to the NE Explorer to set the license for a single NE.
1. IN the NE Explorer, set the license.
1

NOTE

1. To set the license to support TP-Assist, on the right side of the window, change the NE license
status from off to on and click Apply on the lower right corner of the window.
2. To set the license to support a smart line card, in the column of OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card SDH Encapsulation Ability fee or OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card Packet Encapsulation Ability fee, enter the number of virtual ports, and
click Apply.
3. To set the license to support OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup, in the column of
OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup enter the number of borads, and click
Apply

200G/400G license Configuration


None.

4.11 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions


After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client must be started up.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Legend Information
Figure 4-10 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-10 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
1. Navigation path.

2. Checking Network-Wide Software Versions.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

1
3

批注框标注。选择形状,然后开始键入。将框的大
小调整到所需尺寸。移动控制手柄可以将指针对准
要标注的对象。

6
4

批注框标注。选择形状,然后开始键
入。将框的大小调整到所需尺寸。移动
控制手柄可以将指针对准要标注的对
7
象。

3. Obtain the software version of each board in the Software Version column and make
records.
NOTE

The NEs that are loaded with the same software package should have the same software version.
Similarly, the same boards on different NEs that are loaded with the same software package should also
have the same software version. If version inconsistency occurs, immediately provide feedback to the
regional office of Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

4.12 Configuring Boards


In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.

4.12.1 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards
This section describes how to set the board relay mode for the Line boards.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
The board must be created.

Impact on System
None

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Precaution
When configuring board parameters, you should configure the board mode for priority.
Otherwise if the board mode is modified, the services and other board parameters of the board
must be reconfigured.

Background Information
The board works either in Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.The Board Mode
can be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and
electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is
set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode. The parameter must be set to Optical
Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of
ASON services is not available.
NOTE

For the line boards that support the regeneration mode, see the Hardware Description.

To enable the TN54NS4 or TN55NO2 board to work in regeneration mode, select


TN54NS4(REG) or TN55NO2(REG) when creating the logical board and then configure the
board regeneration mode according to the following steps.

Legend Information
Figure 4-11 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-11 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
1. Visit the following navigation path.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2. Set the board relay mode for the line boards.

3
1

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.12.2 Checking Board Parameters


You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you
configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of
board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements. When you need to
adjust the parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to check and modify the relevant
board parameters.
1. Check and modify the parameters for an optical transponder or Ethernet unit. Table 4-2
lists the parameters for the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.

Table 4-2 List of parameters for an optical transponder


Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario

Laser Status 1. In the NE You can turn on or See Open and


Explorer, select shut down a laser Close the Laser on
the by setting the laser the WDM Board.
corresponding status.
board.
Automatic Laser When no light is See Setting
Shutdown 2. Choose input, a laser is Automatic Laser
Configuration automatically shut Shutdown on the
> WDM down and stops WDM Board.
Interface from transmitting optical
the Function signals. The laser
Tree. life can be
3. Click By prolonged by
Board/ decreasing the
Port(Channel) working time of the
and choose laser. In addition,
Channel from this function
the drop-down prevents hazardous
list. laser radiation
4. Click the Basic exposure from
Attributes tab. causing permanent
eye damage.

LPT Enabled You can add the See 17.26


overhead byte that Enabling and
supports the LPT Disabling LPT.
protocol to the
frame format of a
WDM-side signal,
to monitor the
running status of
the network access
point or the service
network.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure


Scenario

Service Type You can query or See Querying and


set on the U2000 Setting the Service
the type of client Type on the Client
services of a board Side of a Board.
to ensure that the
service type on the
client side of the
board is correct

OFC Enabled The OFC function See Enable the


is used to control Open Fiber Control
the transmit optical (OFC).
power of a laser
when a fiber is cut,
and check whether
the fiber recovers
by sending a short
laser pulse.

Actual Wavelength 1. In the NE Used to query the See Configuring


N0./Wavelength Explorer, select operating Board WDM Port
(nm)/Frequency the wavelength at the Attributes.
(THz) corresponding WDM-side optical
board. port of a board.

Configure 2. Choose Used to set the


Wavelength N0./ Configuration wavelength No,
Wavelength (nm)/ > WDM wavelength and
Frequency (THz) Interface from frequency of the
the Function current optical port
Tree. on the WDM side
3. Click By of a board.
Board/
FEC Working State Port(Channel) Used to enable the See Enabling the
and choose FEC function on a FEC Function.
Channel from board.

FEC Mode the drop-down After enabling the See Setting the
list. FEC function, you FEC Mode.
4. Click the should set the
Advanced desired FEC Mode
Attributes tab. for the board.

2. Check and modify the parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit. Table 4-3 lists the
parameters for the tributary unit and the line unit.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Table 4-3 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit
Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario

Laser Status 1. In the NE You can turn on or See Open and


Explorer, select shut down a laser Close the Laser on
the by setting the laser the WDM Board.
corresponding status.
board.
Automatic Laser When no light is See Setting
Shutdown 2. Choose input, a laser is Automatic Laser
Configuration automatically shut Shutdown on the
> WDM down and stops WDM Board.
Interface from transmitting optical
the Function signals. The laser
Tree. life can be
3. Click By prolonged by
Board/ decreasing the on
Port(Channel) time of the laser. In
and choose addition, this
Channel from function prevents
the drop-down hazardous laser
list. radiation exposure
from causing
permanent eye
damage.

LPT Enabled You can add the See 17.26


overhead byte that Enabling and
supports the LPT Disabling LPT.
protocol to the
frame format of a
WDM-side signal,
to monitor the
running status of
the network access
point or the service
network.

NULL Mapping You can set NULL See 17.22 Setting


Status Mapping Status to the NULL
Enabled for a path Mapping Status.
that has no signal,
and check or view
OTN overhead by
using an
instrument, to
monitor the status
of paths in a
network.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure


Scenario

OFC Enabled The OFC function See Enable the


is used to control Open Fiber Control
the transmit optical (OFC).
power of a laser
when a fiber is cut,
and check whether
the fiber recovers
by sending a short
laser pulse.

Service Type You can query or See Querying and


set on the U2000 Setting the Service
the type of client Type on the Client
services of a board Side of a Board.
to ensure that the
service type on the
client side of the
tributary board is
correct

Actual Wavelength 1. In the NE Used to query the See Configuring


N0./Wavelength Explorer, select operating Board WDM Port
(nm)/Frequency the wavelength at the Attributes.
(THz) corresponding WDM-side optical
board. port of a line board.

Configure 2. Choose Used to set the


Wavelength N0./ Configuration wavelength No,
Wavelength (nm)/ > WDM wavelength and
Frequency (THz) Interface from frequency of the
the Function current optical port
Tree. on the WDM side
3. Click By of a line board.
Board/
FEC Working State Port(Channel) Used to enable the See Enabling the
and choose FEC function on a FEC Function.
Channel from board.

FEC Mode the drop-down After enabling the See Setting the
list. FEC function, you FEC Mode.
4. Click the should set the
Advanced desired FEC Mode
Attributes tab. for the board.

3. Check and modify the parameters for an Ethernet unit. Table 4-4 lists the parameters for
the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Table 4-4 List of parameters for an Ethernet unit


Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario

Port Enabled 1. In the NE When you See 17.29.1


Explorer, select configure a service Configuring
the for the port on an Internal Ports.
corresponding Ethernet board,
board. enable the internal
2. Choose port (that is,
Configuration VCTRUNK port).
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select Internal
Port.

TAG 1. In the NE Set the port type of


Explorer, select the internal port on
the an Ethernet board
corresponding on an NE based on
board. the tag attribute of
2. Choose packets that are
Configuration transmitted by the
> Ethernet user-side
Interface equipment.
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select Internal
Port.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure


Scenario

Network Attribute 1. In the NE – If the port is of


Explorer, select the UNI type,
the the port
corresponding processes the
board. tag attributes
2. Choose specified in
Configuration 802.1Q and the
> Ethernet port has the tag,
Interface access and
Management > hybrid
Ethernet attributes.
Interface from – If the port is of
the Function the C-Aware
Tree. type, the port
3. Select Internal does not
Port. process the tag
attributes in
802.1Q. The
port determines
that the data
packet carries a
C-VLAN tag
and processes
only the data
packet that has
the C-VLAN
tag.
– If the port is of
the S-Aware
type, the port
does not
process the tag
attributes
specified in
802.1Q. The
port determines
that the data
packet carries
an S-VLAN tag
and processes
only the data
packet that has
the S-VLAN
tag.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure


Scenario

Port Enabled 1. In the NE When you See 17.29.2


Explorer, select configure a service Configuring
the for the port on an External Ports.
corresponding Ethernet board,
board. enable the external
2. Choose port (that is, PORT
Configuration port).
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port.

Working Mode 1. In the NE Set the transmit


Explorer, select end and receive
the end to have the
corresponding same setting of
board. working mode.
2. Choose
Configuration
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure


Scenario

MAC/PHY 1. In the NE MAC loopback and


LoopBack Explorer, select PHY loopback are
the used to locate a
corresponding fault, but they can
board. interrupt services.
2. Choose In addition, they
Configuration are mutually
> Ethernet exclusive. When
Interface you set MAC
Management > LoopBack to
Ethernet Inloop, PHY
Interface from LoopBack is
the Function automatically set to
Tree. Non-Loopback.
When you set PHY
3. Select External LoopBack to
Port. Inloop, MAC
LoopBack is
automatically set to
Non-Loopback.

Autonegotiation 1. In the NE When the Working


Flow Control Explorer, select Mode of the port is
Mode the Auto-Negotiation,
corresponding select the
board. autonegotiation
2. Choose flow control mode.
Configuration
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port. Click the
Flow Control
tab.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure


Scenario

Non- 1. In the NE When the Working


Autonegotiation Explorer, select Mode of the port is
Flow Control the not Auto-
Mode corresponding Negotiation, select
board. the non-
2. Choose autonegotiation
Configuration flow control mode.
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port. Click the
Flow Control
tab.

TAG 1. In the NE Set the port type of


Explorer, select the external port on
the an Ethernet board
corresponding on an NE based on
board. the tag attribute of
2. Choose packets that are
Configuration transmitted by the
> Ethernet user-side
Interface equipment.
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port. Click the
TAG
Attributes tab.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure


Scenario

Network Attribute 1. In the NE The Port Attribute


Explorer, select (Ethernet Port)
the parameter specifies
corresponding the position of a
board. port in the network.
2. Choose Different port
Configuration attributes support
> Ethernet different packets.
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port.

4. Check and modify the parameters for an optical amplifying unit. Table 4-5 lists the
parameters for the optical amplifying unit.

Table 4-5 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit


Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario

Laser Status 1. In the NE You can turn on or See Open and


Explorer, select shut down a laser Close the Laser on
the by setting the laser the WDM Board.
corresponding status.
board.
2. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel)
and choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
4. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

5. Check and modify the parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit. Table 4-6 lists the
parameters for the spectrum analyzer unit.

Table 4-6 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit


Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario

Wavelength 1. In the NE Enable wavelength See Monitoring


Monitor Status Explorer, select monitoring. Wavelengths by
the Using the
corresponding Spectrum Analyzer
board. Board.
2. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel)
and choose
Monitor
Wavelength
from the drop-
down list.

6. Check and modify the parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit. Table 4-7 lists
the parameters for the optical supervisory channel unit.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Table 4-7 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit


Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario

Laser Status 1. In the NE You can turn on or See Open and


Explorer, select shut down a laser Close the Laser on
the by setting the laser the WDM Board.
corresponding status.
board.
2. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel)
and choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.

7. Check and modify the parameters for SDH units. Table 4-8 lists the parameters for the
SDH units.

Table 4-8 List of parameters for SDH unit


Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Laser Switch 1. In the NE Explorer, You can open or close a


select the laser by setting the laser
corresponding board. switch.
2. Choose Configuration
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
3. Click By Board/
Port(Channel) and
choose Port from the
drop-down list.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Optical (Electrical) 1. In the NE Explorer, Sets loopback according to


Interface Loopback select the the path.
corresponding board.
2. Choose Configuration
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
3. Click By Board/
Port(Channel) and
choose Port from the
drop-down list.

Automatic Laser 1. In the NE Explorer, When no light is input, a


Shutdown select the laser is automatically shut
corresponding board. down and stops
2. Choose Configuration transmitting optical
from the Function signals. The laser life can
Tree. be prolonged by
decreasing the on time of
the laser. In addition, this
function prevents
hazardous laser radiation
exposure from causing
permanent eye damage.

VC4 Path Overhead 1. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the overhead bytes of the VC4
corresponding board. path, including J1 and C2.
2. Choose Configuration
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.

VC3 Path Overhead 1. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the overhead bytes of the VC3
corresponding board. path, including J1 and C2.
2. Choose Configuration
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.

PRBS Test 1. In the NE Explorer, You can set PRBS test of


select the the ports on the board, and
corresponding board. perform the bit error test of
2. Choose Configuration the transmission link
from the Function without attaching a meter
Tree. to the equipment during
the deployment.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
If you select an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, a static optical add/drop multiplexer board, a
dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board, an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator
board, you can choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can query or set
parameters.

Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply.

----End

4.12.3 Adding Ports


Users must add ports on the U2000 according to the physical optical module types used on the
equipment.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
Some client- or line-side ports are not added on the U2000.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Background Information
By default, client-side ports on each board have been added. If you want to add a client-side
port that has been added by default, delete the default port first.

Legend Information
Figure 4-12 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-12 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT


1. Add the ports.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

3
: Right-click a blank space on the right of the Path View window. A shortcut menu is
displayed.

5
: If Bulk add ports is selected, you can add multiple ports with the same type and rate.

4.12.4 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board


If a board supports electrical ports, you must configure the electrical ports on the U2000 to
enable the board to access electrical signals.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l Electrical port modules must be configured on the board.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Legend Information
Figure 4-13 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-13 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT


1. Configure the electrical ports of a board.

6
2
1

NOTE

5
: If you need to modify Type to Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then
add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.

4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board


This topic describes how to commission a multi-carrier line board.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter
U2000

Context
First configure wavelengths in single-site mode and then create OChM trails in search mode
for management.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NS4M Typical networking

Legend Information
Figure 4-14 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-14 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure for commissioning the NS4M board


1. Create the physical and logical fiber connections between the ports of the NS4M and
M40V/D40 boards by strictly following the network plan.

1 2 3 4

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

1. The wavelengths output from the IN1/OUT1, IN2/OUT2, IN3/OUT3, and IN4/OUT4 optical ports
of the NS4M board are consecutive wavelengths with 100 GHz spacing. For details, see
Wavelength Number in the Hardware Description.
2. Because fixed wavelengths are used on the ports of M40V/D40, configure the wavelengths for the
NS4M board strictly based on the wavelengths on M40V/D40. If the wavelength information is
inconsistent, the optical path will be unavailable.
2. Configure wavelengths for the NS4M board as follows: On the main topology of the
U2000, double-click the NE to enter the NE Explorer.

Based on the physical connections, configure the wavelengths for each port of the NS4M
board.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

3
2

3. Configure the fiber connections and wavelengths for the peer NS4M board using the
same method.
4. Adjust the input optical power of the IN ports on the WDM side of the NS4M board to
the optimal range: -9 dBm to -4 dBm.
5. Create OChM trails in search mode. For details, see Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search.
After the search is completed, you can go to the Manage WDM Trail window to view
OChM trails.

6. To ensure that multi-carrier signals are synchronized, lock wavelengths before services
are received. For details, see Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.

4.14 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode


In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Optical NEs and NEs must be created.
l Logic board has been created on the U2000.
l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Planned Wavelength No./
Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed
wavelength.
l Applies to WDM equipment.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the
NE. You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the
U2000 side.

Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click
Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the
Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers
cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking
design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the
remaining fibers.

Legend Information
Figure 4-15 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-15 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000


Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. Create fibers in the synchronization mode.

Note

4 2

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

2
: Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and
that on the NE side are displayed.
– Synchronized Fiber/Cable: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides.
U2000 is the same as the fiber data on NEs.
– Uncreated Fiber in U2000: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NE: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.

4
: Handle different situations as follows:
– If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click Create
Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized fibers are
displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
– If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cable to
delete the uncreated fibers in U2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click Create
Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.

Step 2 To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:


NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see
Configuring the Edge Port.

1. Visit the following navigation path.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2. Select the source board and port and the sink board

4
6

2 5

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exit
object selection.
3. In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.

NOTE

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

Step 3 To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:


NOTE
Creating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. In fact, the FIU fiber
connections between stations are created.

1. Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" .
2. Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology.
3. Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box
displayed.
4. Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again.
5. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology.
6. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box displayed.
7. Click OK
8. Enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

Step 4 Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.
Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.

----End

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Creating Fiber Compared with the graphic


Operation Connections in List Mode mode, the creating fiber
connections in the list mode
is not visual. Hence, the list
mode is applicable to the
scenario where you create a
few fiber connections only.

Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to verify all fibers are created to ensure that the
fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters


Before configuring the centralized monitoring function for the Optical Doctor (OD), you need
set an inter-site fiber type and fiber length. If the fiber type is not configured or is incorrectly
configured, the incident optical power will be incorrectly calculated. If the fiber length is not
configured, there is no impact because the fiber length will be automatically calculated. If the
fiber length is incorrectly configured, the OSNR calculation will be incorrect. The design end
of life (EOL) value of fiber loss must be set to determine whether the fiber loss exceeds the
design EOL value. If the EOL is incorrectly configured, the SPAN_LOSS_EXCEED_EOL
alarm will be reported, indicating that the fiber loss exceeds the design EOL value. This topic
describes how to set the fiber parameters in batches.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l The EOL value has been obtained from the network design document.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Configuration Principles
l If the IN port on the receive optical amplifier (OA) board is equipped with a dispersion
compensation unit (DCU) or a dispersion compensation module (DCM), calculate the
EOL value for the fiber between the local NE and upstream NE using the following
formula: EOL = Design fiber loss + Maximum insertion loss of the DCU/DCM. If an
OLP board is installed in front of the receive OA board, the EOL value for the fiber
between the local NE and upstream NE is equal to the fiber loss between the upstream
OLP board and the local OLP board.
l Ensure that the inter-site fiber type and fiber type are the same as those in the practical
fiber configurations.

Procedure
1. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link
Management from the main menu.
2. In the Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link Management window, click Filter. Clear the
Include internal fibers check box, and click Filter in the Set Fiber/Cable Browse
Filter Criteria dialog box.
3. Select one or multiple fibers/cables in the list and click Modify Fiber/Cable.
4. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, set the Length (km), Designed Loss(EOL)(dB),
and Medium Type of the fibers/cables as required, and click Apply.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

To perform batch setting, select multiple lines, right-click the parameter column, and choose Modify in
Batchs.
5. Click Apply Parameters to NE in the Result dialog box.

6. In the Please Select Setting Scope dialog box, select the desired parameters and click
OK.

7. Optional: Click NE Operation, and select Query. Click OK in the Please Select
Query Scope dialog box to view whether reference parameters is delivered successfully.

4.16 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection


Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT.
The edge port must be configured.
When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical
cross-connection of the single station uses.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Background Information
When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automatically
or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board
automatically adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select
Manual, you need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the
dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the several
types of optical cross-connection trails.
NOTE

The WSMD9/WSMD4/WSMD2 can be used to replace the WSD9 or WSM9.


OA indicates the optical amplifier boards, such as OAU1 and OBU1.
The FIU can be added before or after the OA.
In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards, such as TD20, D40, and MR2, can be added between the
WSD9 and OTU.
In add networking, the multiplexer boards, such as TM20, M40, M40V, and MR2, can be added
between the OTU and WSM9.

NOTE

l The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be
configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar. When creating the
unidirectional optical cross-connect services through RDU module, you cannot select Auto.
Otherwise it fails.
l Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a
single station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.

Procedure on the U2000


1. Create the single-station optical cross-connection.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

5
1
3

6
7

NOTE

5
: Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the

Available Wavelength list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelength.


Click OK.

7
: The optical cross-connection created here does not belong to the optical cross-
connections mentioned in the background information. Therefore, OPA Mode can be set only to
Manual.

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-
Connection tab in the right-hand pane.
2. Click Create. The Create NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE

1. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of
Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available

Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Click


OK.
3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the
window.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Configuring the Edge Port Setting an edge port is to set an


Related optical port of an NE as a
Operation connection point between this NE
and another NE.

Creating Board Optical Cross- The intra-board optical wavelength


Connection route can be set for a board that
performs grooming at the optical
layer. The intra-board service route
is established through the creation
of single-board optical cross-
connection.

4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM


Optical-connections are configured using the NMS to achieve flexible ROADM.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Boards supporting flexible ROADM have been configured.

The TN15OPM8 board has been configured.

Internal fiber connections of the OAU board are completed.

The edge port must be configured.

The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT.

When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical
cross-connection of the single station uses.

Context
You can create NE- or board-level optical cross-connections on the NMS. The following uses
NE-level cross-connection configuration as an example.
l For wavelengths that have fixed optical spectra, the procedure for configuring flexible
ROADM is similar to that for configuring traditional ROADM.
l For wavelengths that have variable optical spectra, the procedure of configuring flexible
ROADM differs from that of configuring traditional ROADM in wavelength selection.

NOTE

l The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be
configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Legend Information
Figure 4-16 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-16 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port.
1

Step 2 Optional: For a wavelength with a fixed optical spectrum, select the wavelengths

1
3


5

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

2
: Select the wavelength as required.

5
: Repeat these steps to set the Sink Wavelength NO. .

Step 3 Optional: For a wavelength with a variable optical spectrum, select the required frequency
based on the wavelengths for the OTU or line board. Click the desired grid.

3
1

4
5
7

NOTE

2
: Select the frequency based as required. A bandwidth spacing of 12.5 GHz is present between two
lines of grids. When you move the cursor over a grid, the corresponding frequency will be prompted.

3
: Wavelengths selected will be displayed in green. Clicking a green area will cancel the selection of
the wavelength.

4
: Wavelengths selected will be displayed here. Clicking a wavelength area will cancel the selection
of the wavelength.

6
: Repeat these steps to set the Sink Wavelength.
A bandwidth spacing of 12.5 GHz is present between two lines of grids. When you move the cursor over a
grid, the corresponding frequency will be prompted.
Note that there is a mapping between Source Wavelength and Source Wavelength No. and between Sink
Wavelength and Sink Wavelength No.. Therefore, if the settings of Source Wavelength and Sink
Wavelength are modified, Source Wavelength No and Sink Wavelength No. will change accordingly.

----End

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.18 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search


After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search
for the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end
WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Fiber connections must be correctly created for the WDM equipment.

Precautions
l If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the
following methods:
– Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the
trail function. This method affects services.
– Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail.
l You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUT
port of the RMU9 board and from the IN port to the DM port of the WSMD9/WSMD4/
WSMD2 board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is not supported. These
types of single-NE optical cross-connections do not impact services. You need to create
these types of single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to
manage the services transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management
function.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Legend Information
Figure 4-17 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-17 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure for the U2000


1. Visit the following navigation path.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

2. Set trail search criteria.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
In the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area
beyond the selected subnet range.
3. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail
from the main menu.
4. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.
NOTE
In the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area
beyond the selected subnet range.
5. Click Next to begin the search for trails. The U2000 takes a while for searching,
depending on the number of services.
NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end
to end trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.
l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: If the networking changes, the trail
may cause interruption of service flow. For example, the key information for the trail,
including deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.
6. Click Next after searching, you can browse all trails found. If you want to set a trail
management flag, right-click it and select the management flag.
NOTE
Skip this step if you selected the "Automatically create trails after searching" policy in Step 2.
7. Click Next to view all discrete services in the network.
NOTE
If Step 4 is performed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the
network layer. This does not affect services for the actual NE or the data for an individual NE on
the U2000.
8. After the search is complete, click Finish.

4.19 (Optional) Configuring OD Route for a Trail


In addition to centralized configuration, individual configuration can be used to configure an
OD route for each trail to achieve E2E OSNR detection. If no OD route is configured, no
OSNR value can be displayed and no OSNR equalization can be performed.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator group" rights or higher.
l The logical fiber connection and optical cross-connection must be properly configured.
l The inter-NE OSC communication in the OMS must be normal.
l Only the TN12OPM8, TN11MCA402, and TN11MCA802 boards support OSNR
detection on signals at a rate of 10Gbit/s, 40Gbit/s, 100Gbit/s.
l In an OMS section, MCA or OPM8 boards must be configured for the first and last OA
boards. If the OMS section contains only one OA board, an MCA or OPM8 board must
be configured for the OA board; otherwise, OSNR cannot be detected for the OMS
section.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Precautions
l For Raman boards, the OD route configuration does not support the CRPC or ROP
board. However, it supports the RAU board in gain locking mode.
l All the OMS sections on a complete OCh trail must be configured with OD route
configuration function; otherwise, the OSNR detection is not supported.
l When a fiber cut occurs on the downstream links, the OPM8 or MCA board at the
receive end of an OMS section cannot detect the optical power. In addition, the OPM8/
MCA4/MCA8 board at the transmit end cannot calculate and display OSNR values of all
detected wavelengths.
l If the OPM8 or MCA board at an ROADM or OTM site is faulty, the OSNR of
wavelengths that traverse this site cannot be detected at the local site or any of the
downstream sites.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Specify the type and length for fibers between sites. For details, see 4.15 Setting Fiber
Parameters.
Step 2 Filtering the OMS trail.
1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
2. In the displayed Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, select OMS in the Service
Level.
3. Click Filter All, and all OMS trails on the live network are displayed.
Step 3 Configure the OD route configuration function for an OMS section.
1. Click Maintenance, and choose OD Route Configuration.
2. The scanning progress window is displayed. After the scanning completes, the Result
dialog box is displayed, click Close.
3. Optional: Click Query All. The status of all OMS sections is refreshed.
4. In the OD Route Configuration window, select an OMS section to be created. Click
New.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

5. In the displayed Result dialog box, click Close.


6. Check whether Status of a set OMS section is Created.
NOTE

When the network topology changes or the boards/fiber connections change, the OD route configuration
function of the OMS sections must be reconfigured.
l Click Query All. The status of all OMS sections is refreshed.
l In the OD Route Configuration window, select the OMS sections affected by the network topology
changes or the boards/fiber connections change. Click New.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the OD route configuration function is configured on the OPM8/MCA4/MCA8 board,
you can use the following methods to locate the causes of an abnormal OSNR.
l In the query of the optical spectrum analysis data, only the optical power can be
obtained. For the OSNR, --- is displayed and OSNR calculation is abnormal. The
possible causes are as follows:
– The OMS section is configured incorrectly or offline boards exist in this section.
Check the function configurations of this OMS section on the NMS and the actual
networking configurations.
– The scanned spectrums at the transmit and receive ends of the OPM8/MCA4/
MCA8 board are inconsistent. Check the scanned wavelength in the OMS section.
– The inter-NE communication is abnormal. Check whether you can log in to NEs
and whether NEs are reachable.
– The upstream OMS section is abnormal. Check the optical spectrum information of
the OPM8/MCA4/MCA8 board in the upstream OMS section along the signal flow
direction. If the same fault exists, use the same methods to locate the causes.
– If the fiber type of the OMS section is modified, the OSNR detection of the OMS
section must be reconfigured refer to Step 3.
l In the query of wavelength information of a specific wavelength in the optical spectrum
analysis data, no information is reported. The possible causes are as follows:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

– The physical fiber connection of the OPM8/MCA4/MCA8 board is incorrect.


Check the physical fiber connection.
– The optical path on the link is abnormal. Check whether the optical path is set up,
for example, whether the optical cross-connection is created, whether the physical
fiber connection is correct, and whether the OA laser is enabled.

4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800


T32/8800 T64
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of
the EFI2. The EFI1 board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack
is 0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of
the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits
1–4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only
ID1-ID6 are valid. The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states
can be set. Currently, the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-18, the value
represented by the ID6-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID
is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the CPLD, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE

For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.

Figure 4-18 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board

EFI1

CPLD (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) ON (ID2) ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON

SW1 SW2

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-19 The ID of the subrack: 1-15


SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8 9 10
ON ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON
(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15

Figure 4-20 The ID of the subrack: 16-31

SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON

The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.

On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE
with one ID and one IP.

Precautions

NOTICE
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Subrack ID Conflict Scenarios and Solutions


The following table describes the subrack ID conflict scenarios and the rules and methods for
resolving conflicts.
Scenario Applicable Impact on Handling Handling
Version Services Rule Method

The port that V100R009C10 The involved Resolve the For details, see
brings a and port has been subrack ID "Procedure for
subrack ID V100R011C00 isolated. conflict the Scenario
conflict and later Therefore, the according to the Where the
(referred to as versions subrack ID isolation alarm Involved Port
the involved NOTE conflict does indication. Has Been
port) has been This function not affect Isolated".
isolated. needs to match services.
the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

The involved Versions earlier Services are Resolve the For details, see
port has not than affected. When subrack ID "Procedure for
been isolated in V100R011C00 a subrack ID conflict and the Scenario
case of a conflict occurs then check for Where the
subrack ID on an NE, the alarms. Involved Port
conflict. board Has Not Been
configurations Isolated".
may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.

The involved When the Resolve the For details, see


port cannot be involved port subrack ID "Procedure for
isolated in cannot be conflict and the Scenario
V100R009C10 isolated or the then check for Where the
and port isolation alarms. Involved Port
V100R011C00 becomes Has Not Been
and later invalid, services Isolated".
versions. will be frozen.
NOTE Therefore,
This function neither services
needs to match nor DCN is
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
When a subrack ID conflict occurs, service freezing of the conflict subrack is not affected before the isolation
takes effect or when the isolation fails or becomes invalid. Because the service board communication is
frozen when a subrack ID conflict occurs, other operations such as service configuration and deployment
commissioning cannot be performed. Therefore, handle the subrack ID conflict as soon as possible.

Involved Port Cannot Be Isolated or Isolation Become Invalid

Table 4-9 Tree-like subrack cascading


Limitation Scenario Networking
Example

Isolat When a A subrack


ET从子架 2
ion subrack ID conflict Master Subrack 0
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
identific information
ation of the 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
port the AUX 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136
synchro
Copyright
nization
© Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

When When the


two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
subrack with that of
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
identific identificati
ation on
informat information 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
with the switches, a
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
subrack occurs after
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Man When The IDs of ET从子架


Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack

ual the two slave


H2 H2

opera subrack subracks 从子架


Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack

tions IDs of conflict. 从子架


Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
requi conflict NE1 does
red with not have
after each slave
isolat other subrack 2,
ion. and the the subrack
local NE is
does not automatical
have the ly installed.
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
After the subrack of
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.

Table 4-10 Ring-like subrack cascading

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A Master 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

ion subrack subrack in


fails. is added a version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

to the earlier than


middle V100R011 从子架
Slave Subrack22 从子架
Master 20
Subrack

of a ring C00(exclud
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

occurs. A slave 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

The subrack of
involved any version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

port is added to
cannot the middle 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

be of a ring
isolated. network.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If subrack IDs are repeated or blinking, a subrack ID conflict occurs.
NOTE

l When the IDs of the master and slave subracks conflict, a SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is
reported. Then the master and slave subracks check for the conflict port and disable the port.
l After the involved port is disabled, the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is cleared and the
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm indicating the involved port is disabled is reported. Based on
the new alarm, you can identify the port to which the conflict subrack is connected.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Enable the communication port.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Access Control from
the navigation tree. Select the desired communication port and change the port status to
Enabled.
NOTE
After the communication port is enabled, the RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm is cleared.
4. Ensure that the current alarms do not include the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT or
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm.
5. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board into the slave
subrack, and add a logical board for the physical board on the U2000. Check whether the
board goes online and starts properly. To be specific, check whether the board is
displayed green on the U2000. If the board can properly go online and start, the master
and slave subracks are correctly configured.

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Not Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs are repeated, it indicates a subrack ID conflict.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Double-click the optical NE on the U2000 to view the status information of the optical
NE.
4. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current
Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms.
5. Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master
subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
6. Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.
NOTE
If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, change the subrack ID according planning so
that each subrack is unique.
7. Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
NOTE
If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, change the subrack ID according planning to set
the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC board in
this subrack.
8. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave
subrack and add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board
goes online properly (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave
subrack is correct.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the


Operation Shelf attributes of a master or
slave shelf.

4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800


T16
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of
the EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is
0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4
of SW2, and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6
are valid. The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be
set. Currently, the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-21, the value represented by
the ID6-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the T1, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE

For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.

Figure 4-21 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board

U8
SERIAL
T1

SW1 SW2
NM_ETH2
(ID8)
(ID7)
(ID6)
(ID5)

(ID4)
(ID3)
(ID2)
(ID1)
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON

SW1 SW2

Figure 4-22 The ID of the subrack: 1-15


SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8 9 10
ON ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON
(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-23 The ID of the subrack: 16-31

SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON

The LED front panel of the AUX indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master
subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE
with one ID and one IP.

Precautions

NOTICE
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Subrack ID Conflict Scenarios and Solutions


The following table describes the subrack ID conflict scenarios and the rules and methods for
resolving conflicts.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Scenario Applicable Impact on Handling Handling


Version Services Rule Method

The port that V100R009C10 The involved Resolve the For details, see
brings a and port has been subrack ID "Procedure for
subrack ID V100R011C00 isolated. conflict the Scenario
conflict and later Therefore, the according to the Where the
(referred to as versions subrack ID isolation alarm Involved Port
the involved NOTE conflict does indication. Has Been
port) has been This function not affect Isolated".
isolated. needs to match services.
the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

The involved Versions earlier Services are Resolve the For details, see
port has not than affected. When subrack ID "Procedure for
been isolated in V100R011C00 a subrack ID conflict and the Scenario
case of a conflict occurs then check for Where the
subrack ID on an NE, the alarms. Involved Port
conflict. board Has Not Been
configurations Isolated".
may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.

The involved When the Resolve the For details, see


port cannot be involved port subrack ID "Procedure for
isolated in cannot be conflict and the Scenario
V100R009C10 isolated or the then check for Where the
and port isolation alarms. Involved Port
V100R011C00 becomes Has Not Been
and later invalid, services Isolated".
versions. will be frozen.
NOTE Therefore,
This function neither services
needs to match nor DCN is
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
When a subrack ID conflict occurs, service freezing of the conflict subrack is not affected before the isolation
takes effect or when the isolation fails or becomes invalid. Because the service board communication is
frozen when a subrack ID conflict occurs, other operations such as service configuration and deployment
commissioning cannot be performed. Therefore, handle the subrack ID conflict as soon as possible.

Involved Port Cannot Be Isolated or Isolation Become Invalid

Table 4-11 Tree-like subrack cascading


Limitation Scenario Networking
Example

Isolat When a A subrack


ET从子架 2
ion subrack ID conflict Master Subrack 0
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
identific information
ation of the 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
port the AUX 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149
synchro
Copyright
nization
© Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

When When the


two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
subrack with that of
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
identific identificati
ation on
informat information 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
with the switches, a
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
subrack occurs after
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Man When The IDs of ET从子架


Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack

ual the two slave


H2 H2

opera subrack subracks 从子架


Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack

tions IDs of conflict. 从子架


Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
requi conflict NE1 does
red with not have
after each slave
isolat other subrack 2,
ion. and the the subrack
local NE is
does not automatical
have the ly installed.
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
After the subrack of
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.

Table 4-12 Ring-like subrack cascading

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A Master 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

ion subrack subrack in


fails. is added a version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

to the earlier than


middle V100R011 从子架
Slave Subrack22 从子架
Master 20
Subrack

of a ring C00(exclud
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

occurs. A slave 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

The subrack of
involved any version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

port is added to
cannot the middle 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

be of a ring
isolated. network.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If subrack IDs are repeated or blinking, a subrack ID conflict occurs.
NOTE

l When the IDs of the master and slave subracks conflict, a SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is
reported. Then the master and slave subracks check for the conflict port and disable the port.
l After the involved port is disabled, the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is cleared and the
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm indicating the involved port is disabled is reported. Based on
the new alarm, you can identify the port to which the conflict subrack is connected.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Enable the communication port.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Access Control from
the navigation tree. Select the desired communication port and change the port status to
Enabled.
NOTE
After the communication port is enabled, the RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm is cleared.
4. Ensure that the current alarms do not include the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT or
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm.
5. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board into the slave
subrack, and add a logical board for the physical board on the U2000. Check whether the
board goes online and starts properly. To be specific, check whether the board is
displayed green on the U2000. If the board can properly go online and start, the master
and slave subracks are correctly configured.

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Not Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs are repeated, it indicates a subrack ID conflict.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Double-click the optical NE on the U2000 to view the status information of the optical
NE.
4. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current
Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms.
5. Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master
subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
6. Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.
NOTE
If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, change the subrack ID according planning so
that each subrack is unique.
7. Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
NOTE
If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, change the subrack ID according planning to set
the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC board in
this subrack.
8. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave
subrack and add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board
goes online properly (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave
subrack is correct.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the


Operation Shelf attributes of a master or
slave shelf.

4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800


The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a
secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.
The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and
for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

l For the TN11AUX01 board that has three jumpers inside, the jumpers can be set in eight
combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers
is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack and the other values indicate slave
subracks. Figure 4-24 shows the position of the three jumpers. When the two pins on the
right of each jumper are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each
jumper are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 4-24, the jumper setting
represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.
l For the TN11AUX01 board that has eight jumpers inside, the J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18,
jumpers are reserved and the two pins on the left of each reserved jumper must be
capped. The J4, J3, and J2 jumpers can be set in 8 combinations, representing decimal
values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the
master subrack and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 4-25 shows the
position of the jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each of the three jumpers are
capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each of the three jumpers are
capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 4-25, the jumper setting represents the
decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.
NOTE

Jumper caps must be installed for all the preceding jumpers based on the plan of actual subrack IDs.

Figure 4-24 Position of the three jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board

Representing Representing Representing


0 0 1

1 2 3

Junper cap

Jumpers

1 2 3

CPU

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-25 Position of the eight jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board

Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing 1

J4 J3 J2
Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing0

J17 J16 J15


Representing 0 Representing0

Junper cap
J18 J14

J4 J3 J2

J17 J16 J15 Jumpers

J18 J14

CPU

NOTICE
The J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 4-25 .
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.

The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that
represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

TN11AUX02 board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five
jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks.
Figure 4-26 shows the jumpers on the board.

Figure 4-26 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board

Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing 1

J4 J3 J2
Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing0

J17 J16 J15


Representing 0 Representing0

Junper cap
J18 J14

J4 J3 J2

J17 J16 J15 Jumpers

J18 J14

CPU

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTICE
The J14, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 4-26.
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.

The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE
with one ID and one IP.

Precautions

NOTICE
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Subrack ID Conflict Scenarios and Solutions


The following table describes the subrack ID conflict scenarios and the rules and methods for
resolving conflicts.
Scenario Applicable Impact on Handling Handling
Version Services Rule Method

The port that V100R009C10 The involved Resolve the For details, see
brings a and port has been subrack ID "Procedure for
subrack ID V100R011C00 isolated. conflict the Scenario
conflict and later Therefore, the according to the Where the
(referred to as versions subrack ID isolation alarm Involved Port
the involved NOTE conflict does indication. Has Been
port) has been This function not affect Isolated".
isolated. needs to match services.
the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Scenario Applicable Impact on Handling Handling


Version Services Rule Method

The involved Versions earlier Services are Resolve the For details, see
port has not than affected. When subrack ID "Procedure for
been isolated in V100R011C00 a subrack ID conflict and the Scenario
case of a conflict occurs then check for Where the
subrack ID on an NE, the alarms. Involved Port
conflict. board Has Not Been
configurations Isolated".
may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.

The involved When the Resolve the For details, see


port cannot be involved port subrack ID "Procedure for
isolated in cannot be conflict and the Scenario
V100R009C10 isolated or the then check for Where the
and port isolation alarms. Involved Port
V100R011C00 becomes Has Not Been
and later invalid, services Isolated".
versions. will be frozen.
NOTE Therefore,
This function neither services
needs to match nor DCN is
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

NOTE
When a subrack ID conflict occurs, service freezing of the conflict subrack is not affected before the isolation
takes effect or when the isolation fails or becomes invalid. Because the service board communication is
frozen when a subrack ID conflict occurs, other operations such as service configuration and deployment
commissioning cannot be performed. Therefore, handle the subrack ID conflict as soon as possible.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Involved Port Cannot Be Isolated or Isolation Become Invalid

Table 4-13 Tree-like subrack cascading


Limitation Scenario Networking
Example

Isolat When a A subrack


ET从子架 2
ion subrack ID conflict Master Subrack 0
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
identific information
ation of the 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
port the AUX 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164
synchro
Copyright
nization
© Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

When When the


two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
subrack with that of
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
identific identificati
ation on
informat information 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
with the switches, a
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
subrack occurs after
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Man When The IDs of ET从子架


Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack

ual the two slave


H2 H2

opera subrack subracks 从子架


Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack

tions IDs of conflict. 从子架


Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
requi conflict NE1 does
red with not have
after each slave
isolat other subrack 2,
ion. and the the subrack
local NE is
does not automatical
have the ly installed.
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
After the subrack of
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.

Table 4-14 Ring-like subrack cascading

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A Master 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

ion subrack subrack in


fails. is added a version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

to the earlier than


middle V100R011 从子架
Slave Subrack22 从子架
Master 20
Subrack

of a ring C00(exclud
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

occurs. A slave 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

The subrack of
involved any version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

port is added to
cannot the middle 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

be of a ring
isolated. network.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If subrack IDs are repeated or blinking, a subrack ID conflict occurs.
NOTE

l When the IDs of the master and slave subracks conflict, a SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is
reported. Then the master and slave subracks check for the conflict port and disable the port.
l After the involved port is disabled, the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is cleared and the
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm indicating the involved port is disabled is reported. Based on
the new alarm, you can identify the port to which the conflict subrack is connected.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Enable the communication port.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Access Control from
the navigation tree. Select the desired communication port and change the port status to
Enabled.
NOTE
After the communication port is enabled, the RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm is cleared.
4. Ensure that the current alarms do not include the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT or
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm.
5. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board into the slave
subrack, and add a logical board for the physical board on the U2000. Check whether the
board goes online and starts properly. To be specific, check whether the board is
displayed green on the U2000. If the board can properly go online and start, the master
and slave subracks are correctly configured.

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Not Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs are repeated, it indicates a subrack ID conflict.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Double-click the optical NE on the U2000 to view the status information of the optical
NE.
4. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current
Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms.
5. Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master
subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
6. Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.
NOTE
If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, change the subrack ID according planning so
that each subrack is unique.
7. Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
NOTE
If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, change the subrack ID according planning to set
the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC board in
this subrack.
8. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave
subrack and add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board
goes online properly (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave
subrack is correct.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the


Operation Shelf attributes of a master or
slave shelf.

4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal


Platform Subrack
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of
the EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is
0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

DIP switches on the board panel: Figure 4-27 shows the position of the DIP switches on the
EFI board.
l The TN18EFI board has a set of five DIP switches whose IDs are ID1-ID5 from the
lower bit to the higher bit. Each DIP switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1.
When the DIP switch is toggled to 0, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. DIP
switches must be toggled to the topmost or the bottommost. Otherwise, the subrack ID
cannot be intuitively identified.
l A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the
master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 4-27, the
value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the
subrack ID is 1.
DIP switches within the board: Figure 4-28 shows the position of the DIP switches on the
EFI board.
l The TN18EFI board has a set of eight DIP switches. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of
SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-
ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1. Each DIP
switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1. When the DIP switch is toggled to ON,
the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the
master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 4-28, the
value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the
subrack ID is 1.

Figure 4-27 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI panel

NM_ETH1 ALMI1 ALMO1 ALMO2 NM_ETH2


ID5 ID4 ID3ID2ID1
1
X
0

ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1


1
X
0

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-28 Position of the DIP switches within the EFI board

ON (ID8) ON (ID4)
ON (ID7) ON (ID3)
ON (ID6) ON (ID2)
ON (ID5) ON (ID1)

SW1 SW2

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-29 The ID of the subrack: 0-31

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Error Hexadecimal subrack ID displayed in the LED

0 Decimal subrack ID

The LED front panel of the EFI/SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master
subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.

On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE
with one ID and one IP.

Precautions

NOTICE
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Subrack ID Conflict Scenarios and Solutions


The following table describes the subrack ID conflict scenarios and the rules and methods for
resolving conflicts.
Scenario Applicable Impact on Handling Handling
Version Services Rule Method

The port that V100R009C10 The involved Resolve the For details, see
brings a and port has been subrack ID "Procedure for
subrack ID V100R011C00 isolated. conflict the Scenario
conflict and later Therefore, the according to the Where the
(referred to as versions subrack ID isolation alarm Involved Port
the involved NOTE conflict does indication. Has Been
port) has been This function not affect Isolated".
isolated. needs to match services.
the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

The involved Versions earlier Services are Resolve the For details, see
port has not than affected. When subrack ID "Procedure for
been isolated in V100R011C00 a subrack ID conflict and the Scenario
case of a conflict occurs then check for Where the
subrack ID on an NE, the alarms. Involved Port
conflict. board Has Not Been
configurations Isolated".
may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.

The involved When the Resolve the For details, see


port cannot be involved port subrack ID "Procedure for
isolated in cannot be conflict and the Scenario
V100R009C10 isolated or the then check for Where the
and port isolation alarms. Involved Port
V100R011C00 becomes Has Not Been
and later invalid, services Isolated".
versions. will be frozen.
NOTE Therefore,
This function neither services
needs to match nor DCN is
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
When a subrack ID conflict occurs, service freezing of the conflict subrack is not affected before the isolation
takes effect or when the isolation fails or becomes invalid. Because the service board communication is
frozen when a subrack ID conflict occurs, other operations such as service configuration and deployment
commissioning cannot be performed. Therefore, handle the subrack ID conflict as soon as possible.

Involved Port Cannot Be Isolated or Isolation Become Invalid

Table 4-15 Tree-like subrack cascading


Limitation Scenario Networking
Example

Isolat When a A subrack


ET从子架 2
ion subrack ID conflict Master Subrack 0
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
identific information
ation of the 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
port the AUX 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178
synchro
Copyright
nization
© Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

When When the


two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
subrack with that of
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
identific identificati
ation on
informat information 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
with the switches, a
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
subrack occurs after
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Man When The IDs of ET从子架


Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack

ual the two slave


H2 H2

opera subrack subracks 从子架


Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack

tions IDs of conflict. 从子架


Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
requi conflict NE1 does
red with not have
after each slave
isolat other subrack 2,
ion. and the the subrack
local NE is
does not automatical
have the ly installed.
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
After the subrack of
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.

Table 4-16 Ring-like subrack cascading

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A Master 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

ion subrack subrack in


fails. is added a version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

to the earlier than


middle V100R011 从子架
Slave Subrack22 从子架
Master 20
Subrack

of a ring C00(exclud
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

occurs. A slave 从子架


Master 20
Subrack

The subrack of
involved any version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack

port is added to
cannot the middle 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack

be of a ring
isolated. network.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Limitation Scenario Networking


Example

Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If subrack IDs are repeated or blinking, a subrack ID conflict occurs.
NOTE

l When the IDs of the master and slave subracks conflict, a SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is
reported. Then the master and slave subracks check for the conflict port and disable the port.
l After the involved port is disabled, the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is cleared and the
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm indicating the involved port is disabled is reported. Based on
the new alarm, you can identify the port to which the conflict subrack is connected.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Enable the communication port.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Access Control from
the navigation tree. Select the desired communication port and change the port status to
Enabled.
NOTE
After the communication port is enabled, the RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm is cleared.
4. Ensure that the current alarms do not include the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT or
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm.
5. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board into the slave
subrack, and add a logical board for the physical board on the U2000. Check whether the
board goes online and starts properly. To be specific, check whether the board is
displayed green on the U2000. If the board can properly go online and start, the master
and slave subracks are correctly configured.

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Not Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs are repeated, it indicates a subrack ID conflict.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Double-click the optical NE on the U2000 to view the status information of the optical
NE.
4. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current
Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms.
5. Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master
subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
6. Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.
NOTE
If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, change the subrack ID according planning so
that each subrack is unique.
7. Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
NOTE
If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, change the subrack ID according planning to set
the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC board in
this subrack.
8. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave
subrack and add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board
goes online properly (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave
subrack is correct.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the


Operation Shelf attributes of a master or
slave shelf.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

5 Automatically Commissioning Optical


Power Through MDS 6630

About This Chapter

This section describes the scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is
used to automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and procedure
for the commissioning. The WDM optical power commissioning tool is mainly used to
commission optical power of a new WDM network or a live WDM network under expansion.
This tool supports remote and automatic commissioning of optical power of WDM
equipment.
5.1 Networking Scenarios
This topic describes the networking scenarios that the MDS 6630 component supports.
5.2 Precautions for Commissioning
This topic describes the precautions that you need to take for commissioning WDM
equipment.
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power for Power Equilibrium Commissioning
This topic describes the commissioning scenarios, process, and procedure that the optical
power equilibrium commissioning tool supports.
5.4 Commissioning Report
The U2000 offers various types of reports to support different optical power commissioning
scenarios for WDM equipment.
5.5 Reference Operations
This topic provides reference operations for commissioning.
5.6 FAQ
This topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical power
commissioning.
5.7 Event Code
This topic describes methods of handling the event code.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

5.1 Networking Scenarios


This topic describes the networking scenarios that the MDS 6630 component supports.

Availability
The G.652(SMF-28)/G.655(LEAF)/G.655(TWRS)/TWC/TW+/SMF-LS/G.653 fibers can be
commissioned using U2000.
Table 5-1 lists the supported board types.

Table 5-1 Supported board types


Multiple Demulti OA Static Reconfig MCAa VOA
xer plexer Optical urable
Add/ Optical
Drop Add and
Multiple Drop
xer (MRx Multiple
Series) xer

M40, D40, OAU1, MB2, RDU9, TN11MC VA1, VA4


M40V D40V OBU1, MR2, RMU9, A401,
OBU2, MR4, WSD9, TN11MC
DAS1, MR8, WSM9, A402,
RAU1, MR8V WSMD2, TN11MC
RAU2 WSMD4, A801,
WSMD9, TN11MC
TM20, A802,
TD20 TN11OP
M8,
TN12OP
M8

a:
l TN11MCA401, TN11MCA801, and TN11OPM8 does not support the OSNR detection
of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s wavelengths.
l If the function of detecting center wavelengths is not required, use the TN12OPM8
board.

Network and site models that supports the monitoring and commissioning is shown in
Network Models. In addition, this tool cannot be used to implement automatic
commissioning if a live network does not use a topology described in this section; instead
users need to manually commission the network.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

l This section describes how to commission sites OTM, OLA, FOADM, and ROADM in a 40-channel
system with examples. The WDM optical power commissioning tool also supports automatic
commissioning of these sites in an 80-channel system.
l Broadcast and multicast networks do not support automatic optical power commissioning on this tool.

Network Models
l Chain network:
West East

OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM

A B C D E F G

l Ring network:

A C

H D

G E
l Mesh network:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

A C

B
K

H D

G E

: OTM : OLA : OADM

Application Scenarios of OTM


l Typical OTM
OTU OPM8

OTU M
U OA
X

OTU

F
I
U
OPM8
OTU
D
OTU M
OA
U
X

OTU

l Back-to-back OTM 1

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

OPM8 D OPM8
M
M
U
U OTU OTU
OA X OA
X
OTU OTU

OTU OTU
F F
I I
U U

OPM8 OTU OTU OPM8


OTU OTU
D
M
OA OTU M OA
U OTU
U
X
X

l Back-to-back OTM 2

OPM8 D D OPM8
M M
U U
OA OA
X X

F F
I I
U U

OPM8 OPM8

D
M
OA M OA
U
U
X
X

Application Scenarios of OLA


l OLA using only a single OA on a link

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

OPM8

OA

F F
I I
U U
OPM8

OA

l OLA using cascaded OAs


OPM8

OA OA

F F
I I
U U
OPM8

OA OA

Application Scenarios of FOADM


l FOADM using cascaded MRx boards (1)
OPM8 OPM8

OA OA

F F
MRx MRx I
I
U U
OA OA

OPM8 OPM8
O O
T T
U U

l FOADM using cascaded MRx boards (2)

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

OPM8 OPM8

OA OA
F F
I MRx MRx MRx MRx I
U U

OA OA

OPM8 OPM8

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

l FOADM using cascaded MRx boards (3)


OPM8 OPM8

RO TO
OA OA
TO RO
F I I F
I T T I
U L RE TE L U
OA M M
TE RE OA
R R
x x
OPM8 OPM8

O O
T T
U U

Application Scenarios of ROADM


l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (1)

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

DMUX MUX

OA OA
OPM8 OPM8

F F
I OA WSD9 WSM9 OA I
U U

OA WSM9 WSD9 OA

OPM8 OPM8
OA OA

MUX DMUX

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (2)

OPM8 W W OPM8
S S
D M
OA 9 9 OA
F F
I I
U U

W W
OA S S OA
M D
9 9
OPM8 OPM8

WSM9 WSD9

OPM8
OA OA
OPM8

FIU

l ROADM using WSD9+RMU9 boards (1)

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

MUX
DMUX

OA

OPM8 OPM8
TOA
F F
I OA WSD9
ROA OA I
RMU9
U U

OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
TOA
OPM8 OPM8

OA

MUX DMUX

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

l ROADM using WSD9+RMU9 boards (2)


O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

MUX
DMUX

OA

OPM8
TOA
F OPM8 F
I ROA I
OA WSD9 RMU9
U OA U

OA
RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
OPM8
TOA
OPM8

OA

MUX DMUX

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

l ROADM using WSD9+RMU9 boards (3)

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

MRx
MRx

OA

OPM8
TOA
F OPM8 F
I ROA I
OA WSD9 RMU9
U OA U

OA
RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
OPM8
TOA
OPM8

OA

MRx
MRx

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

l ROADM using RDU9+WSM9 boards


O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

DMUX MUX

OA
OPM8 OPM8

F F
I OA RDU9 WSM9 OA I
U U

OA WSM9 RDU9 OA

OPM8 OPM8
DMUX
OA

MUX

O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

l ROADM using TD20+TM20 boards

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

O O O O
O O O O
T T T T
T T T T
U U U U
U U U U

TD20 TD20 TM20 TM20

WSD9 WSM9

OA
OA
OPM8 OPM8

F F
I OA RDU9 OA I
WSM9
U U

OA WSM9 RDU9 OA

OPM8 OPM8
OA OA

WSM9 WSD9

TM20 TM20 TD20 TD20

O O O O
O O O O
T T T T
T T T T
U U U U
U U U U

l ROADM using cascaded WSMDx boards


O O
T T
U U

OPM8 OPM8

OA OA
F F
I WSMDx WSMDx I
U U
OA OA

OPM8 OPM8
OA OA
OA OA

DMUX MUX MUX DMUX

O O
T T
U U

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

WSMDx boards are classified into WSMD4 and WSMD2 boards. If the WSMD2 board is used, an
OTU board must be connected to a multiplexer board so that the OTU board can add/drop a wavelength
and the demuliplexer board must be connected to the WSMD2 board.

Application Scenario of RAU


NOTE

Only the TN14FIU/TN16FIU board can work with the RAU board.
RAU boards include RAU1 board and RAU2 board. The RAU2 board contains VOA module while the
RAU1 board does not.

5.2 Precautions for Commissioning


This topic describes the precautions that you need to take for commissioning WDM
equipment.

Prerequisite
l The equipment is installed properly and has passed the hardware installation check. The
expected results are as follows:
– Line fibers are connected correctly through the ODF.
– A fiber is connected to the dispersion compensation module (DCM) and the DCM
fiber connection is checked.
– Ensure that all equipment must be powered on correctly, and communication
between all NEs on the network is normal.
– 15-min performance events are enabled for the WDM equipment.
– Ensure that at least one OTU board is configured at each site excluding OLA.
– The optical port on the OTU board is enabled at the transmit end of the WDM
equipment.
– Physical fiber connections must be correct.
NOTE

You need to check the installation quality of the preceding hardware before commissioning the optical
power. For the check standards of other hardware, see the relevant equipment manual.
l Non-GNEs require that the network must use the OSC but not ESC communication
mode. GNEs do not have particular requirements on the communication mode.
l Optical NEs are classified by function. Ensure that an optical NE is configured with
essential boards. For example, OTU boards and MUX/DEMUX boards must be
configured on an OTM optical NE. Do not configure the OTU and MUX/DEMUX
boards on separate NEs.
l Only the sites where OA boards are configured at the receive end can be commissioned.
l OA boards (including RAU) must be Gain locking. Otherwise, U2000 cannot perform
optical power commissioning on the network.
l Physical and logical fiber connections must be consistent.
l The U2000 supports configuring ALC links on OMS trails, and the U2000 automatically
disables the ALC link and stops the APE functions of the NEs before commissioning and
enables the ALC and APE functions after the commissioning is complete. Automatic

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

regulation remains disabled. You are advised to set Automatic Regulation Switch of the
ALC links to Disabled and stop the APE functions or if you have to keep these functions
enabled before commissioning.
l Create or search for WDM OCh trails on the U2000 before using the commissioning
function. For details, see Creating OCh Trails and Searching for WDM Trails.
l Both the transmit-end and receive-end NEs on the commissioning trail have been online.
l Fiber types have been correctly set. For details, see Setting Fiber Parameters.
l Before expansion or maintenance commissioning, ensure that:
– No pre-FEC BER threshold-crossing alarm or OTU optical power threshold-
crossing alarm is generated on the existing wavelengths.
– The flatness of all wavelengths on the network is within the permitted range
specified in the system design.

Precautions
l If iManager MDS 6630 component is used at the first time, you must synchronizing data
on the U2000, see Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
l Do not modify subnet data during commissioning.
l Stop the WDM commissioning processes before deploying new U2000 instances (such
as NE management instances), and restart the WDM commissioning processes after the
deployment is complete.
l If you have uploaded NE data to the U2000, synchronized NE data, or initialized U2000
data, synchronize data on the U2000 before commissioning.
l Do not perform optical power commissioning during software package Loading.
Otherwise, the commissioning operation will be failed.
l When the U2000 is upgraded by migrating database data using the upgrade tool UExpert,
all U2000 data can be smoothly migrated to the upgraded U2000, and OD parameters do
not need to be set again. If the U2000 is upgraded in another mode, database data cannot
be smoothly migrated to the U2000, and therefore OD parameters need to be set again
after the upgrade is completed.
l If the level of a trail is OCh-Group, the trail must be deleted from the U2000 and then a
bidirectional trail needs to be searched again.
l For OptiX NetStar O&M 1.2.010, ensure that the preset insertion loss values of the
related boards are correct before performing commissioning.

Limitation
l The integrated equalization feature on U2000 supports concurrent commissioning on a
maximum of twenty clients.
l The CWDM network cannot be commissioned.
l The broadcast scenarios cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The CRPC or ROP board does not support the monitoring or commissioning.
l PID cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The network without the MCA/OPM cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l System commissioning is not supported when electrical regeneration boards are
configured on multiple cascaded sections.
l Monitoring and commissioning of alien wavelengths and unterminated trails are not
supported.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

l For the coherent transmission system, the G.652(SMF-28)/G.655(LEAF)/G.


655(TWRS)/TWC/TW+/G.653 fibers can be commissioned.
l If a WDM network is deployed and commissioned manually, you need to evaluate and
optimize the network manually before optimizing and commissioning optical power for
the network by MDS 6630 component during maintenance (including ASON rerouting
optimization).
l Commissioning dual-homed diamond ASON services is not supported.
l Monitoring and commissioning of looped services are not supported.

Note
The MDS 6630 supports operations on the optical NEs copied from the U2000.

5.3 Commissioning Optical Power for Power Equilibrium


Commissioning
This topic describes the commissioning scenarios, process, and procedure that the optical
power equilibrium commissioning tool supports.

5.3.1 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a


New Network
When an entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network,
commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioning
process described in this topic. The purpose of commissioning optical power is to commission
the network performance to meet the requirements for transferring services, and ensure that
there is a certain margin of system optical power to perform network expansion and long-term
stable running of the system.

NOTICE
For new deployment commissioning, trails to be commissioned and their associated trails
(OCh Trails that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) board and affect each other) cannot
carry services. Otherwise, services on the trails are interrupted during commissioning because
lasers are shut down for the OTU boards on the trails.

Commissioning Process
This topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment by
using the U2000 during the deployment of a new network.
Figure 5-1 shows the flowchart for commissioning optical power by using the U2000.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Figure 5-1 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of a new network

Start

Synchronize data on the


U2000.

Set fiber type.

Set OA board parameters.

Choose commissioning
trails.

Record the optical power


before commissioning.

Commission the optical


power.

View the commissioning


result.

Preset the OPA insertion


loss for OCh paths

End Mandatory Optional

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

If you use the MDS 6630 component for the first time or you have changed NMS configurations, you must
synchronize MDS 6630 component data and NMS data. For details, see Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
If an ASON network is used, you must preset OPA insertion loss for OCh trails. For details, see Presetting
OPA Insertion Loss for OCh Trails.

Preparing for the Commissioning


Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, you need to make
preparations for the commissioning. The preparations include preparing related documents,
checking the conditions of WDM equipment to be commissioned, preparing the data
configuration files for the WDM NEs, and evaluating whether the network scenarios of the
network to be commissioned support optical power commissioning.

Preparing Documents
The documents that you need to prepare are mainly engineering documents. If there are no
engineering documents at some offices, obtain relevant information from the
telecommunications design documents and contract. The contents of engineering documents
include:

l Network diagram: Used to set the NE ID, IP address, and other parameters before
commissioning optical power.
l Network configuration diagram: Used to check and confirm the network topology.
l Wavelength distribution diagram: Used to obtain information about channels contained
in OCh trails when the wavelengths that have the same source and sink are in the same
trail.
l Cabinet panel diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.
l Fiber connection diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.

Preparation and Precautions for Commissioning


Before commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment, check whether the following
conditions are met:

l You can refer to 5.1 Networking Scenarios to check whether the live network
conditions satisfy the commissioning requirements.
l You can refer to Precautions for Commissioning to check whether equipment satisfies
the commissioning requirements.

Setting Fiber Types


This topic describes how to set fiber types in batches. If no fiber types are set or the fiber
types are incorrectly set, the correctness of the incident optical power that is automatically
calculated when no incident optical power is configured will be affected, causing an incorrect
adjustment on incident optical power. In addition, for the RAU board, the commissioning will
fail or the gain of the Raman module will be incorrectly adjusted.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Configuration Principles
For a fiber whose source or sink is RAU, the fiber type must be the same as the value of
Fiber Type set for the RAU board on the NE Explorer of the U2000.
NOTE

On the NE Explorer, select the RAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
navigation tree to check the value of Fiber Type set for the RAU board.

Procedure
1. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link
Management from the main menu.
2. In the Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link Management window, click Filter. Clear the
Include internal fibers check box, and click Filter in the Set Fiber/Cable Browse
Filter Criteria dialog box.
3. Select one or multiple fibers/cables in the list and click Modify Fiber/Cable.
4. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, set the Medium Type of the fibers/cables as
required, and click Apply

NOTE

To perform batch setting, select multiple lines, right-click the parameter column, and choose Modify in
Batchs.
5. Click Apply Parameters to NE in the Result dialog box.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

6. In the Please Select Setting Scope dialog box, select the desired parameters and click
OK.

7. Optional: Click NE Operation, and select Query. Click OK in the Please Select
Query Scope dialog box to view whether reference parameters is delivered successfully.

Setting OA Board Parameters


This topic describes how to set OA board parameters. This operation must be completed
before the optical power commissioning of a WDM trail. In this operation, set System
Wavelengths, Rate, Code Type, and Launch Power, that determines the typical
commissioning value of a single wavelength on an optical amplifier (OA) in the WDM trail.
Ensure that all the preceding parameters are correctly set. If any parameter is not set, the
commissioning will fail. If any parameter is incorrectly set, the optical power adjustment will
be incorrect.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintainer Group" authority or higher.
l You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.

Configuration Guidelines
l Set System Wavelengths based on the maximum number of wavelengths supported by
the system. If System Wavelengths is not set, the optical power target value cannot be
calculated. If the parameter is incorrectly set, the optical power adjustment will be
incorrect.
You can set the value of System Wavelengths based on the frequency allocation table in
the marketing telecom design documents or based on the actual product configurations.
For example:
– If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M40 or D40 boards, the System
Wavelengths value is 80wave.
– If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M40 or D40 board, the System
Wavelengths value is 40wave.
l For the scenario that signals of different rates traverse the same OA, for example, when
40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s signals are received in a 100G system and the signals traverse
the same OA, set the Rate and Code Type of the OA based on 100 Gbit/s signals.
l The value of Launch Power queried on the Board Parameter Settings tab is the launch
power set on the U2000. If the value of Launch Power is displayed as /, the NMS data
may not be synchronized or this parameter is not set for the board on the U2000. In this
scenario, you are advised to perform the following operations:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

a. Synchronize NMS data.


b. If the value of Launch Power is still displayed as /, set Launch Power for the
board on the Board Parameter Settings tab.
NOTE

To use the OD function, ensure that the Launch Power and System Wavelengths parameters are set on
the Board Parameter Settings tab.
During launch power commissioning:
l In general, System Wavelengths, Rate, and Code Type need to be set by subnet only on the
Commissioning Parameter Settings tab. When NEs on different subnets are interconnected and
the values of System Wavelengths, Rate, and Code Type for the subnets are inconsistent, the
three parameters need to be set on the Board Parameter Settings tab for boards on the NE of a
subnet so that the parameter values are consistent with the parameter values on the interconnected
subnet.
l The Launch Power value set for the board will be preferentially used. If Launch Power is not
set for the board, ensure that other OA parameters including System Wavelengths, Rate, Code
Type, and Fiber Type are correct. If other parameters are properly set, the system can
automatically calculate the launch power based on the settings of other OA parameters to ensure
accurate launch power commissioning.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Parameter Configuration from
the main menu.
Step 2 Optional: Click the Commissioning Parameter Settings tab. Set System Wavelengths,
Rate, and Code Type for each subnet. This step is not required when the OD function is used
because the settings are invalid for the OD system.
Step 3 Click the Board Parameter Settings tab. Set Launch Power, System Wavelengths, Rate,
and Code Type for boards.
1. Set filter criteria. Click OK to filter the boards for which parameters need to be set.

NOTE

To perform batch setting, select multiple boards, right-click a parameter column, and choose the desired
value.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

2. Set System Wavelengths of each OA board.


3. Set Rate and Code Type, or set Launch Power of the egress OA board at the transmit
end.
NOTE

– Before setting Launch Power, you must set Source of Launch Power to Manually Set.
– In the high-power fiber access scenario, Launch Power must be set.
– In case of setting the launch power on a per-NE basis, the launch power of the related OA board
will be automatically displayed after NMS data synchronization.

Step 4 Click OK.


Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
To ensure that the optical power is more accurately commissioned, you can set the attributes
of specific OA boards such as the rate, code type, and system wavelengths based on the
practical networking scenario. For details, see 5.5.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information.

Choosing Commissioning Trails


The U2000 commissions optical power based on the OCh trail. Therefore, OCh trails need to
be created before commissioning optical power.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Maintainer Group" authority or higher.
l The fiber connection data is complete and correct.
l Creating OCh trail is complete.
l To successfully create a OCh trail, ensure that the following requirements are met:
– The logic fiber connection has been set up correctly on the U2000.
– Optical cross-connections are correctly configured for reconfiguration optical add/
drop multiplexer (ROADM) sites in the network.
– If wavelength protection, extended wavelength protection, or line protection exists
in the network, protection groups are correctly configured.
– Ensure that the wavelength No. and FEC mode of the OTU boards are configured
correctly.

NOTICE
Topological resource changes such as fiber deletion or optical cross-connection deactivation
will affect existing OCh trails. Therefore, re-create OCh trails before commissioning the
optical power.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning Trail
Management from the main menu.
Step 2 In Set Trail Filter Criteria window, select the desired filter criteria and click Filter All or
Incremental Filter.
NOTE

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.


l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental Filter.

NOTE

You can also click Subnet Settings tab to filter the subnets.

Step 3 The desired filtering OCh trails are displayed in the Commissioning Trail Management.

NOTE

l Select a trail, and the trail detail diagram is displayed in Trail Details.
l Select a trail, and the information of the associated trails is displayed in Associated Trail.
l When the board uses four wavelengths to transmit one OTU4 signal, set Level of the trail to OChM.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

On the Trail Details tab, you can right-click the desired OA board and select Set OA Info to set the
information about the OA board.

NOTE

During dimension expansion, if the number of system wavelengths of the expanded dimensions is different
from the number of system wavelengths on the original subnet, configure optical amplifiers for expansion
based on the actual networking. For details, see Setting Optical Amplifier Information.

----End

(Optional) Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning


An optical power commissioning report can be created to record the before-commissioning
data. The report helps verify that the optical power has been commissioned successfully.

Prerequisites
l OCh trails have been Filtered. For details, see Choosing Commissioning Trails.
l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see Setting OA
Board Parameters.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters:
l Pre-FEC BER at the receive end
l Input and output optical power of the OA board and the OTU board

You can also commission the optical power directly, without generating a commissioning
report.

Procedure
Step 1 Export the optical power commissioning report. For details, see 5.4.2 Generating a
Commissioning Report.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Step 2 View the OCh Trail Data sheet to obtain the following information:
l Wavelengths and channels of all the boards on the to-be-commissioned trails, and optical
power information that can be queried, including the input optical power and output
optical power
l Input and output optical power, pre-FEC BER of the OTU board
Step 3 View the Single-Wavelength Data sheet to obtain the single-wavelength input and output
optical power of the OA board.
Step 4 View the Span Data sheet to obtain the fiber attenuation.

----End

Commissioning Optical Power


By using the function of automatic optical power commissioning during deployment of a new
network, commission the optical power of one or more specified trails at a time. In addition,
no manual operation is required during the automatic commissioning process. This mode
saves manual intervention, shortens the commissioning time, and improves commissioning
efficiency.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintainer Group" authority or higher.
l If the commissioning tool is used at the first time, you must synchronizing data on the
U2000. For details, refer to Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
l The trails to be commissioned are complete trails. trails without sinks or sources cannot
be commissioned.
l Subnet parameters have been configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precaution

NOTICE
If the channel attenuation on the associated trails of the to-be-commissioned trail has been
configured before deployment commissioning and the associated trails work in the ESC
communication mode, the communication will be interrupted during the deployment
commissioning, resulting a commissioning failure. Therefore, turn off the laser for the
wavelengths on the associated trails before the deployment commissioning in this scenario.
During deployment commissioning, the directly associated trails of the to-be-commissioned
trail will not be commissioned. In addition, lasers on the transmit-end OTU boards on the
directly associated trails will be automatically turned off.
During deployment commissioning, for boards supporting bidirectional switching, if
commissioning on the working trail or protection trail in either direction fails, the
commissioning on both the working and protection trails of the boards will fail.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Because the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power equilibrium (APE) function
for the system may start during the commissioning, pay attention to the following points:
l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, you should stop the APE
function of the NEs, and stop the ALC function of the NEs or set the Automatic
Regulation Switch of the ALC function is Disabled, and that the OPA function is not in
the Auto state before commissioning.
l For NG WDM equipment of V100R005 and V100R006, the U2000 automatically stops
the ALC and APE functions of the NEs before commissioning and enables the ALC and
APE functions after the commissioning is complete. You are advised to stop the ALC,
and APE functions or set Automatic Regulation Switch of the ALC function to
Disabled if you have to keep these functions enabled before commissioning.
l For NG WDM equipment of V100R007 or later versions, the U2000 supports
configuring ALC links on OMS trails, then the U2000 automatically disables the ALC
link and stops the APE functions of the NEs before commissioning and enables the ALC
and APE functions after the commissioning is complete. You are advised to set
Automatic Regulation Switch of the ALC links to Disabled and stop the APE functions
or if you have to keep these functions enabled before commissioning.
l Before commissioning, the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function must be disabled
for the network to be commissioned. After the commissioning is completed, the IPA
function must be enabled again.
Before commissioning, check whether Raman boards meet amplified spontaneous emission
(ASE) conditions based on the actual line loss and usage requirements of Raman boards,
calibrate ASE for the Raman boards that met the conditions, and ensure that the Raman lasers
are in the On state.
Do not shut down the laser of the wavelength that is associated with the to-be-optimized
wavelength before the commissioning; otherwise, the commissioning may fail.
During the commissioning, the client may be disconnected from the server due to unexpected
interruptions in communication, in which case the server will continue the commissioning.

When the client is reconnected to the server, click to view the operation tasks. For
details, see 5.5.1 Viewing Operation Tasks. Perform the commissioning again after the trails
are completely commissioned if you want to ensure that the operation is successful.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning Trail Management
window of U2000, select trails to be commissioned and click Operate > New Deployment
Commissioning.
NOTE

For boards supporting bidirectional switching, select both the forward and reverse trails of the boards for
deployment commissioning.

Step 2 In the New Deployment Commissioning window, select the trails to be commissioned.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

l For OChM trails on which each board transmits one OTU4 signal using four wavelengths,
commissioning can be performed only in any of the three conditions: Four forward trails are selected, four
reverse trails are selected, and all the four forward and four reverse trails are selected. During the
commissioning, the BER values of the trails in the same direction are queried using the IN1 port of the
receive-end board. Therefore, all the BERs of the trails in the same direction are the same.
l After the deployment commissioning is complete, the Receive Optical Power(Working/Protection) and
BER(Working/Protection) columns respectively display the optical power and BER of the receive line
board or OTU board on the commissioned OCh trail and the protection trail. If an OCh trail does not have
a protection trail, only the receive optical power and BER of the OCh trail are displayed. For example,
-5dB/- is displayed in Receive Optical Power(Working/Protection).

Step 3 Optional: Click Advanced Option. The system displays the Advanced Option dialog box,
where commissioning options are available.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

l By default, Restore laser status is selected on the Advanced Option. If this option is not selected,
after the commissioning is completed, the system does not turn on the lasers that are turned off
during the commissioning and whose wavelength BER does not satisfy the requirement.
l In Advanced Option, Set the trail maintenance state is selected by default. If it is deselected, the
status of a trail will not be automatically changed to Maintenance Status after the trail is
successfully commissioned. For details about Maintenance Status of trails, see Setting the State of
OCh Trails.

Step 4 Click Start to commission the optical power. The Prompt dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK, a Prompt dialog box is displayed. Confirm the commissioning parameters of the
subnets.
Step 6 Click OK, the MDS 6630 component begins to commission the optical power.
NOTE

During the commissioning process, you can obtain the commissioning progress from information in Boards
or from the progress information that is displayed at the bottom of the window.

Step 7 During the commissioning process, the Check Wavelength Status window is displayed
asking you whether to disable lasers for wavelengths that do not need to be commissioned. If
you want to disable them, click Continue. Otherwise, click Cancel.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Step 8 The Disable Laser dialog box is displayed. Click Continue to confirm. Otherwise, click
Cancel. The Prompt dialog box is displayed and click OK.

Step 9 After commissioning is complete, the Commissioning Completed dialog box is displayed. In
this dialog box, click OK.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

After the commissioning is complete, the trails in the commissioning information are displayed in different
colors. Perform subsequent operations based on the colors of the trails.
l Black: indicates that services are successfully deployed on a trail and no subsequent operations are
required.
l Yellow-orange: indicates that services are successfully deployed on a trail but you must check the data
displayed in yellow-orange in Boards.
l Red: indicates that no services are deployed on a trail and you must check the data displayed in red in
Boards.

----End

Result
Query the commissioning information in the New Deployment Commissioning window and
check whether the result meets the requirement.
l Select the desired trails and Click Save as.... Select the target trail and desired file name.
You can save the trail information in the U2000 window and the commissioning data in
Boards to an .xls file.
A filename must include date and time information (recommended format: Year-Month-
Day-Hour-Minute) to prevent a file saved later from overwriting a file with the same
name saved earlier.

– Trail information:

– Board information:

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

l Right-click in the Public Message area and choose Select All from the shortcut menu
that is displayed. Copy all the selected information to a text file and save the file for later
view.

l Select the desired trails and Click Generate Commissioning Report. For details, refer
to Viewing the Commissioning Result.

Troubleshooting
l If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 5.6 FAQ in the
Optical Power Commissioning Window, and then retry the commissioning.
l If the commissioning result is abnormal, click Rollback to roll back the commissioning
operation and save data after the rollback is complete.
Click Rollback to roll back the commissioned trails. In the dialog box that is displayed,
click OK to start restoring the commissioned trails to original optical power. After the
original optical power is restored, a dialog box is displayed indicating successful
operations. In this dialog box, click OK.
NOTE

After the rollback is complete, you must check the reported information. If error information is
displayed, rectify the fault accordingly.

Viewing the Commissioning Result


When optical power commissioning is complete, check whether the commissioning result
meets the requirements by viewing the commissioning report.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Prerequisites
Optical power commissioning has been completed.

Background Information
When optical power commissioning is complete, pay attention to the following parameters in
the commissioning result:
l Pre-FEC BER at the receive end
l Input and output optical power of the OA board and the OTU board

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Generate the commissioning report, and view the input and output optical power of the
available boards on the trails, and information about wavelengths, channels for the OCh trails.
Step 2 In the OCh Trail Data sheet, check whether the input optical power, output optical power,
pre-FEC BER of the OTU board, and the gain of the OA board meet the requirements.
NOTE

If the pre-FEC BER does not meet the requirement, check whether the optical power is appropriate by
performing the follow-up steps in this topic.
If the optical power is appropriate, check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM)
configuration of the related trails is consistent with that in the design file.
The optical power of the input port of the OTU board must be within input optical power alarm
threshold. In the report, the board data that does not meet the requirements of the commissioning result
is marked red.
The optical power of the output port of the OTU board must be within the specified range of the board.

Step 3 In the Single-Wavelength Data sheet, check whether the single-wavelength input and output
optical power of the OA board meet requirements.
Step 4 If the average single-wavelength input optical power of the OA board is lower than the
nominal single-wavelength input optical power, check whether the insertion loss and fiber
attenuation of the upstream board of the OA board are appropriate.
l The insertion loss of a board must be within the specification range of the board.
l For the OA board, check and analyze the contents marked red in the report. The contents
marked red indicate exceptions.
Step 5 In the Span Data sheet, check whether the fiber attenuation meets requirements.

----End

Presetting OPA Insertion Loss for OCh Trails


After new deployment, site/degree/wavelength expansion, or board replacement is performed
on an ASON network, you can preset the insertion loss for new OCh trails on the network to
achieve optical power adjust (OPA). In other words, you can divide a new OCh trail into
multiple OPA spans, preset insertion loss for the port or channel of each OPA span, and
deliver the insertion loss to the related NE, achieving quick OPA during ASON service
rerouting.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Prerequisite
l The required ASON LSP management licenses have been obtained.
l The maximum number of system wavelengths has been configured. For details about the
configuration method, see Setting OA Board Parameters.
l Each OA board is connected to an MCA or OPM board, the fibers are clean, and all fiber
connections are correct.
l Complete OCh trails are configured.
l Setting up the optical paths of desired trails is complete.

Precautions
When services are running, ensure that the services are not interrupted.

Context
l When OPA insertion loss is preset for an OCh trail for the first time, the OPA preset
insertion loss configurations are applied to both ports and channels of the trail.
l If port insertion loss has been preset on the desired OCh trail, port insertion loss can be
performed for ports again only when the OPA spans on the OCh trail do not support
channel insertion loss. When the OPA spans support channel insertion loss, only channel
insertion loss can be preset.
l Based on the signal flow of an OCh trail, you can view the OPA spans that the signals
traverse and check the value of Current Output Power of Sink. If the value deviates
greatly from the nominal value, channel insertion loss needs to be preset. Preset
Insertion Loss can be automatically calculated or changed as required. Then, you need
to deliver the preset insertion loss again to make it take effect.
l During channel insertion loss preset, ensure that the difference between Preset Insertion
Loss and Current Insertion Loss does not exceed 2.0 dB; otherwise, an error message
will be displayed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning Trail
Management from the main menu.
Step 2 In Set Trail Filter Criteria window, select the desired filter criteria and click Filter All or
Incremental Filter.
NOTE

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.


l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental Filter.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

You can also click Subnet Settings tab to filter the subnets.

Step 3 In the Commissioning Trail Management window, select desired OCh trails and choose
Operate > OCh Path Preset OPA Insertion Loss.
Step 4 In the OCh Path Preset OPA Insertion Loss window, select the OCh trails. The OPA Path
area displays all the OPA spans that the OCh trails contain.

Step 5 Optional: Query the current insertion loss preset status.


1. Select the OPA span for which insertion loss needs to be preset and click Query.
2. After the query is complete, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE

In the OCH Path Preset OPA Insertion Loss window, you can click any header of the table in the
OPA Path area to display the OPA spans in descending or ascending order.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

NOTE

– Port/Channel Insertion Loss: If the value is Port Insertion Loss, only port insertion loss
instead of channel insertion loss can be preset. If the value is Channel Insertion Loss, channel
insertion loss is preset. If the value is Not Supported, no attenuation needs to be adjusted for
an OPA span.
– Logical Insertion Loss: indicates the sum of the nominal insertion loss of each board in the
OPA spans. The nominal insertion loss is read by the from devices, however, insertion loss
cannot be read from passive devices such as the DCM board.
– Port Insertion Loss: indicates the port preset insertion loss. If the actual insertion loss is
displayed as /, the insertion loss is unknown, which maybe because the insertion loss is not
preset.
– Insertion Loss Offset: indicates the value obtained by subtracting the logical insertion loss
from the target insertion loss. If an OPA span has the current insertion loss, this parameter
indicates the difference between the current insertion loss and logical insertion loss. The value
is also called wastage.
n -1.5 <= wastage =< 2.5: The insertion loss is successfully preset.
n wastage <-1.5 or wastage>2.5: If an insertion loss value is marked in red, the insertion
loss value exceeds the permitted range. If the insertion loss value is excessively small,
you are advised to check the fiber quality or fiber end face cleanness of the MCA or
OPM board connected to the MON port of the transmit-end OA board. If the insertion
loss value is excessively large, you are advised to check the fiber quality or fiber end
face cleanness of the MCA or OPM board connected to the MON port of the receive-end
OA board. After the cause is found and the problem is solved, preset the insertion loss
again.

Step 6 Calculate Preset Insertion Loss.


1. Click Auto-Calculate. After the calculation is complete, click OK in the confirmation
dialog box. The newly calculated Preset Insertion Loss are displayed in red.
NOTE

If a message is displayed, indicating that the operation is partially successful and the failure cause is
that no corresponding optical cross-connection is found at the source or sink, no optical cross-
connections are configured for the OPA span.
2. Click Apply. Then click OK in the confirmation dialog box. The insertion loss is applied
to the NE and then OPA adjustment is triggered.
3. Click Query. The Current Output Power of Sink is updated based on OPA adjustment
results.
4. If Current Output Power of Sink cannot meet requirements, repeat Step 6.1 toStep
6.3.
If the output optical power of the OA board cannot reach the nominal value, Current
Output Power of Source must match with Current Output Power of Sink. If they do
not match, repeat Step 6.1 to Step 6.3. For example, if the source and sink OA boards of
an OPA span are OAU100 and OAU101, the current nominal output optical power of the
source board should be approximately 2 dB less than the current nominal output optical
power of the sink board.
NOTE

You can query and obtain the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength for the OA boards.
For details, see Querying Commissioning Index Data.

Step 7 Optional: Modify Preset Insertion Loss.


1. Check Current Output Power of Sink of the wavelength. If the value deviates
significantly from the nominal value, modify it using the automatic calculation function
or directly use an empirical value.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

2. Double-click a value in the Preset Insertion Loss column and change it. After the value
is changed, it is displayed in red.
3. After modification, click Apply.
4. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 8 Optional: Clear the insertion loss of the OCh trails.
1. Select the desired OCh trails, and click Clear.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
3. Click Query to check the values of the channel insertion loss are cleared.

----End

Result
Preset channel insertion loss has higher priority than preset port insertion loss. When preset
channel and port insertion loss values are available, the channel insertion loss value is used
with preference during OPA adjustment.
l Click Save As... to save the result of presetting insertion loss.
a. Click Save As.... In the displayed dialog box, enter the row number in the From
text box and end time in the To text box.

b. Optional: Click . Select the path for saving the file, enter the file name, and
select the file type and code. Click Save.
NOTE

The default file type is an .txt file. For the convenience of viewing the data, it is
recommended to save data to an .xls file.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

c. In the Save As window, and click OK to save data.


l The preset result will be automatically saved in the ..\client\report\ directory. You can
view the preset information in this directory.

5.4 Commissioning Report


The U2000 offers various types of reports to support different optical power commissioning
scenarios for WDM equipment.

5.4.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report


Before generating an optical power commissioning report, filter the commissioning trails and
set subnet commissioning parameters.
Before you generate the optical power commissioning report, ensure that the following tasks
have been completed:
l The commissioning trails have been filtered. For details, see Choosing Commissioning
Trails.
l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see Setting OA
Board Parameters.

5.4.2 Generating a Commissioning Report


This topic describes how to generate a commissioning report. The commissioning report
consists of the OCh Trail Data, Single-Wavelength Data, and Span Data sheets.

Prerequisites
Before you generate the optical power commissioning report, ensure that the following tasks
have been completed:
l The commissioning trails have been filtered. For details, see Choosing Commissioning
Trails.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see Setting OA
Board Parameters.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
l For an 80-channel system with no OA board configured at the transmit end, no data is
displayed in Span Data in the report.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the trails to generate reports.
l Method 1: In the Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning
Trail Management window of U2000, choose Operate > Commissioning Report.
l Method 2: In the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management >
Online Optimization Management. In the interface that is displayed, select the desired
trails and click Generate Commission Report.
l Method 3: If optical power commissioning is complete, you can click Generate
Commission Report in the commissioning window to generate all commissioning
reports.

Step 2 In the Export Report dialog box, set Data type and Data range and specify the save path for
the report..
NOTE

l Select Selected and Associated Trails as required to generate information about associated trails in the
report.
l If Based on trails in the maintenance state is selected, the generated report will contain data of only
trails in the state of Maintenance; if Based on trails in the maintenance state is not selected, the
generated report will contain data of all selected trails.

Step 3 Click Generate to start generating the commissioning report. A progress bar is displayed.

----End

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Description of Parameters in a Trail Report


A hyphen (-) indicates that the corresponding parameter is not supported or configured. A
slash (/) indicates that no data is obtained. Abnormal data is marked with a color based on its
abnormality level. The Status column shows the color of the abnormality with the highest
level in the row.
NOTE
For details about how to handle abnormal issues displayed in the report, see 5.6.16 Solutions to Abnormal
Optical Power in the Commissioning Report.

Table 5-2 OCh Trail Data


Parameter Description

Object Optical NE Indicates the optical NEs on an OCh trail.

NE Indicates the NEs on an OCh trail.

Board Indicates the boards on an OCh trail.

Port Indicates the board ports on an OCh trail.

Port Type Indicates the types of board ports on an OCh trail.

Number of Wavelengths Indicates the number of wavelengths on an OA


board port that the OCh trail traverses.

Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Indicates the wavelength No./wavelength (nm)/


Frequency (THz) frequency (THz) of an OCh trail.

Single- Current Value Indicates the current single-wavelength optical


Wavelength Optic power of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
al Power (dBm)
Nominal Indicates the single-wavelength nominal input or
Value / output power of the OA board that an OCh trail
Threshold traverses when the gain of the OA board is the
minimum value, and the input power alarm threshold
of an OTU board.

Average Indicates the average/minimum/maximum single-


Value/ Min. wavelength optical power of a node that the OCh
Value/ Max. trail traverses.
Value NOTE
l When the single-wavelength optical power is not flat,
the value in the Average Value/Min. Value/Max.
Value column is marked in a color indicating a minor
abnormality.
l Click the link to display the Single-Wavelength Data
tab, where the current optical power value of every
single wavelength on the OA is displayed.

Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current single-wavelength OSNR of a


OSNR (dB) node that the OCh trail traverses.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Parameter Description

Min. Value/ Indicates the minimum/maximum single-wavelength


Max. Value OSNR of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
NOTE
Click the link to display the Single-Wavelength Data tab,
where the current OSNR value of every single wavelength
on the OA is displayed.

Multiplexed- Current Value Indicates the multiplexed-wavelength optical power


Wavelength of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
Optical Power NOTE
(dBm) The multiplexed power cannot be queried on the
TN11WSD9 board.

Threshold Indicates the multiplexed-wavelength optical power


threshold of a node that the OCh trail traverses.

Nominal Gain Current Value Indicates the current nominal gain of a node that the
(dB) OCh trail traverses.

Range Indicates the nominal gain threshold of a node that


the OCh trail traverses.

Attenuation (dB) Current Value Indicates the current optical power attenuation of a
node that the OCh trail traverses.

Range Indicates the optical port attenuation range of a node


that the OCh trail traverses.

Span Data Provides a link to the Span Data sheet, where you
can query the span data of the OCh trail.

Pre-FEC BER Current Value Indicates the current pre-FEC BER of a node that the
OCh trail traverses.

Threshold Indicates the pre-FEC BER threshold of a node that


the OCh trail traverses.

FEC Type Indicates the FEC type of a node that the OCh trail
traverses.

Q Value Indicates the Q value of a node that the OCh trail


traverses.
The Q value directly shows the network performance
and each Q value matches a BER value. A greater Q
value indicates better network performance.

CD Compensation Current Value Indicates the current chromatic dispersion (CD)


offset value of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
CD indicates spreading of a pulse in an optical fiber
caused by differences in wave velocity in the
medium.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Parameter Description

DGD Current Value Indicates the current polarization mode dispersion


value of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
The polarization mode dispersion is caused by
imperfect symmetry of cross-sectional area of a
fiber.

In-band noise (dB) Current Value Indicates the current in-band noise of a node that the
OCh trail traverses.

Table 5-3 Single-Wavelength Data


Parameter Description

OA Board Optical NE Indicates the optical NE on the OCh trail where


an OA board resides.

NE Indicates the NE on the OCh trail where an


board resides.

Board Port Indicates an OA board and board port that the


OCh trail traverses.

OSA Board Optical NE Indicates the optical NE where an optical


spectrum analyzer (OSA) board resides.

NE Indicates the NE where an OSA board resides.

Board Port Indicates an OSA board and the board port. This
port is used to analyze the spectrum of an OA
board.

Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Indicates the wavelength No./wavelength (nm)/


Frequency (THz) frequency (THz) of a single wavelength on an
OA board.

Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current input power of a single


Input Optical wavelength on an OA board.
Power (dBm)

Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current output power of a single


Output Optical wavelength on an OA board.
Power (dBm)

Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current OSNR value of a single


OSNR (dB) wavelength on an OA board.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630

Parameter Description

Commissioning Current Value Indicates the commissioning reference value for


Reference Value a single wavelength. You can evaluate network
(dB) performance based on this value.
NOTE
The commissioning reference value indicates the
OSNR deterioration generated after the normalization
progress.

Table 5-4 Span Data


Parameter Description

Inter-Site Source Indicates the source optical NE of an optical transmission


Object Optical NE section (OTS).

Source NE Indicates the source NE of an OTS.

Span Indicates the source OA board of an OTS.


Source Port

OTS Source Indicates the source port of an OTS.

Sink Indicates the sink optical NE of an OTS.


Optical NE

Sink NE Indicates the sink NE of an OTS.

Span Sink Indicates the sink OA board of an OTS.


Port

OTS Sink Indicates the sink port of an OTS.

Fiber Loss Current Indicates the current fiber loss.


Value (dB) NOTE
If the current fiber loss is greater than the specified EOL value, the
current fiber loss is identified as a major abnormality.

Design Indicates the design fiber loss.


Value(EOL)